The history of the Turks Beginning with the year 1679. Being a full relation of the last troubles in Hungary, with the sieges of Vienna, and Buda, and all the several battles both by sea and land, between the Christians, and the Turks, until the end of the year 1698, and 1699. In which the peace between the Turks, and the confederate Christian princes and states, was happily concluded at Carlowitz in Hungary, by the mediation of His Majesty of Great Britain, and the States General of the United Provinces. With the effigies of the emperors and others of note, engraven at large upon copper, which completes the sixth and last edition of the Turks. In two vol. in folio. By Sir Paul Rycaut, kt. eighteen years consul at Smyrna, now his Majesty's resident at Hamburg, and fellow of the Royal Society.

So soon as he was dead, Mustapha Eldest Son to Sultan Mahomet IV. was proclaim∣ed, and saluted Emperor, and all passed without any Disturbance, Disorder, or In∣convenience whatsoever.

In very few Hours afterwards the Body of the Deceased Achmet was hurried away to Constantinople, and with a small Atten∣dance buried in the Sepulcher of his Bro∣ther, and immediately the Sultana, his Mother, was required to hasten thither and retire, and Expresses dispatched to all Parts to carry and divulge the News, and most especially acquaint the New Valide Sultana with the Exaltation of her Son to the Throne of his Father. For the present Sul∣tan Mustapha being about 33 Years of Age, and in his Prime, appeared very Robust, and Comely, and to show a mildness of Spirit at the beginning, he for the present confirmed the Great Vizier in his Place, by restoring the Seals to him which he had resigned into his Hands, and giving him a Coftan lined with Sables. His Mo∣ther was now every Day expected at A∣drianople, until whose coming thither, no∣thing was to be done; for as she was a Person highly beloved, and esteemed by her late Husband Sultan Mahomet, Father of the present Sultan Mustapha (as we have manifested in our foregoing History) so she was a Woman of Intrigue, and one who had so great a Power over her Son, that he entirely gave himself up to the Go∣vernment and Guidance of his Mother.* 1.1 She was a Native of Canea (tho' some say she was a Circassian born) and taken from thence when the Place was first possessed by the Turks; her Father was a Protopapa, or Bishop of that place.

His first entrance into Business was to enquire after the State of the Treasury; and to inform himself therein,* 1.2 he called for the Treasurer, and demanded of him, How much Money there was in the Trea∣sury? To which Answer was made, Fif∣teen Purses: What then (said he) is become of all the rest? To which it was answered, That his Predecessor had disposed of it: It is well, (said he) and I shall take it from them who have received it.

With these Beginnings it was much fear∣ed that he would prove a troublesome Neighbour to all Christendom; and a Cruel and a Severe Master to all the surviving Ministers of State; but things were carri∣ed so closely, that the Government had no News of any thing until the Successor had carried his Point, and secured every thing for his Establishment; to which many things concurred, as that he was the Son, and lineally descended from Sultan Maho∣met IV, who after a Reign of 48 Years, was Deposed, by reason of the Ill Fortune, and Avaritious Temper of some of his Mi∣nisters, or to please the Soldiers, who said, That he had Lived and Reigned long e∣nough. Moreover the People had a great Esteem for this his Son, being Young and Handsome, and in his Robust and Mature Age; nor was there any Person able to stand against him, nor capable of being of∣fered to the Soldiery for their Emperor: There was none of the Ottoman Family known unto the World, but a Child of two Years old, the Son of the late Sultan Ach∣met, and of such an one in such a Conjun∣cture of time, it was not so much as to be thought of; tho' most of the Ministers in Power did all they could to keep Sultan Mustapha from the Throne.

His Beginnings were very brisk,* 1.3 (for besides what he said to the Treasurer) he startled the Grand Vizier, and all the Pa∣sha's of the Bench, who knew not what to say, or act, or resolve, or whom to trust,

[illustration] portrait of Ottoman Sultan Mustafa II

Sultan Mustapha the Second, the Present Emperour Eldest Son to Sultan Mahomet the 4^th p: 522

M. Vander Gucht Scul

This suddain change humbled much of the Spirit of the Grand Vizier, so that he did not adventure to act so freely in Business as he had formerly done in the time of Sultan Achmet: For tho' he had received several Favours of his New Master, which served to encourage him at first, yet they were so mixed with his Frowns, and Im∣perious Threats, that he thought not him∣self safe, but lived in a continual appre∣hension of Death.

When the Grand Seignior Vested him, as is commonly done by every Sultan at his Inauguration;* 1.4 he told him,

That he should be careful what he did, that he should treat his Soldiers well, and above all, that he be sure to tell him the truth; and if not, he should soon know and be sensible of what would follow:

But since this Severity,* 1.5 and sharp Saying, he re∣mitted something of his Angry Temper, and became more mild and easie; so that to encourage and raise his Spirit a little, he sent his Kuzlir-Aga in Ceremony with a great Attendance, to carry to the Grand Vizier a Prayer, which he himself had composed in the time of his Solitude, and Seclusion from the World, which were re∣ceived with profound Respect; the Bearer himself had five Purses presented to him, and the Chief of his Attendants was treat∣ed with several Rich Vests, and the others of meaner Degree had a good number of Zaichins distributed amongst them.* 1.6 The Grand Seignior also would not want his own Present, which was in Horses, and Jewels, several Young Damsels, richly a∣dorned, with above 100 Purses of Mo∣ney; and yet for all this the Vizier thought not himself safe, nor did the bitter Thoughts of Death pass from him: for whilst he was trembling for himself, he received a Hatte-sheriff, or a Royal Command from the Hand of the Grand Seignior, requiring him to command the Chiaus Pasha to Arrest the Chimacam of Adrianople, the Vizier's own chief Creature and Confident, and to put him between the Gates, a Prison for great Personages: The Fault objected to his Charge was, That in the time of the late Sultan Achmet, he had put to Death two of this present Sultan's Favourites, for en∣deavouring to promote the Interest of their Master, to the Prejudice of the Ruling Prince. Notwithstanding all which Mor∣tifying Commands, and Accidents, the Grand Vizier appeared outwardly with a chearful Countenance, for the least Sad∣ness would have been interpreted for Con∣tumacy, and a Discontented Spirit a∣gainst the Commands and Pleasure of his Master; for which reason he bore up brave∣ly against all Misfortunes, concealing the Agitations of his Mind from all those who had Business with him, and even from his own Domesticks.

At this time my Lord Paget Ambassa∣dor from His Majesty King William,* 1.7 was then at Adrianople, watching an Opportu∣nity to make Proposals for a Peace with the Emperor, of which, tho' about the lat∣ter time of Sultan Achmet, there was a great and a fair appearance; yet after his Decease this young Sultan mounting the Throne, all the hopes vanished, he him∣self being of a hot and fiery Spirit, was fully resolved to try his Fortune in the War, from which Design neither his Mo∣ther, nor his Women, nor his greatest Fa∣vourites could divert them. And the Kiah-Bey himself, who was Lieutenant-General, of the Janisaries, a Person of great Esteem, and Power in the Army, was disgraced, and put out of Office, for arguing in the Divan against the Grand Seignior's taking ths Field this Year in Person.

These Changes had disconcerted all the Measures which my Lord Paget had taken towards a Peace, of which there now re∣mained no hopes for this Year; for the Sultan was not to be removed from his Re∣solution, nor the Soldiery averse to it, ha∣ving fixed it in their Minds, that this Sul∣tan was Lucky and Fortunate, and was to restore all that had been lost, since the Siege of Vienna, and the fatal Managements of the Grand Vizier Kara Mustapha. And to this purpose the Grand Seignior discour∣sing with the Vizier, he told him, how sensi∣ble he was of the evil management of Af∣fairs in the Empire, and that they were much worse than they had been in the time of his Father; to restore which to a better Condition, he again declared his Resolu∣tion to try his Fortune for another Year; the which not succeeding well, he was of an Opinion, That he could at any time make a Truce with the Christians, which perhaps he might be inclined to accept next Year, not out of a Necessity thereof, but in consideration to his People, to whom, after a long War of 17 or 18 Years, he was glad to give Ease and Quiet; for he was sensible, that the Ottoman Empire was in great Disorder, by reason of the Igno∣rance, Negligence, and ill Administration of some of the principal Ministers of State, which he would make it his Care to re∣medy.

With these Resolutions of the Sultan, all things were preparing to take the Field early with a strong Army; it being di∣vulged, and published amongst the Sol∣diery, that their first March should be to∣wards

Belgrade, from whence if they could have made any Conquest on the other side of the Save, the Turks might yet (as low as they were) have proved a troublesome, and a dreadful Enemy to all Germany. And indeed the Christians were more sensible hereof than formerly; for the Turks had lately had many lucky Hits to encourage them, and which did indeed animate the People very much, seeming to them like good Omens of Change of Fortune in their favour: For the Venetians had in two se∣veral Engagements at Sea been worsted by the Turks, which was the cause of the Sur∣render of Scio to the Turks, of which they possessed themselves without any great Difficulty; where tho' the loss the Veneti∣ans had sustained both in Ships, and Men, was very considerable, yet the loss of their Reputation at Sea, was much more, and of a more evil Consequence; for the Turks animated hereby, fell boldly upon the Ve∣netians in the Morea, and put them to the Rout, fansying the Summer following to regain all again, despising now the Enemy which lately they durst not see, and were affraid to approach.

To these good Fortunes of the Sultan, the News was added by way of Moldavia, of a great Victory that the Tartars had obtained against the Poles; which with the Successes the Ottoman Pasha's had ob∣tained against the Rebels in Asia, put all things at the Port into a smiling Conditi∣on, no Man doubting, but that the influ∣ence of these prosperous Beginnings would crown all the Actions of this New Sultan, with Success and Victory.

The Fight between the Poles and the Tartars, in the Suburbs of Leopolis, hap∣pened on the 11th of February of this Year, being Extracted out of a Letter of the Great General, Written to the Envoy Cavalier Proski, of the 16th of February from Leopolis.

An Extract of the Great Gene∣ral's Letter, Written to the Envoy Cavalier Proski.

WE have not only in the Season of the last Spring, but during the whole Summer, and Autumn, lived in continual Alarms, and Skirmishes with our Enemies, but even in this very Win∣ter been engaged with them in divers Bloody Fights: And particularly on the 11th of this Month of February, a Bat∣tle was made between 3000 of our Sol∣diers, against 70000 Tartars, within the Suburbs, and under the Walls of Leo∣polis: The Particulars of which, are these.

Sultan Zabas Gerei,* 2.1 Son of the Tartar-Han, who in the Month of October last, gave up to our Hands, all the Provisions belonging to the Turks, which he had ta∣ken into his Care and Conduct to be Con∣voyed to Kaminieck; of which Disgrace, and Dishonour his Father being very sen∣sible, urged the Son to repair his Credit by some great Action worthy the Fame of his Valour, and his Prowess in War: Accordingly being assisted by all the Power of the Tartars, as well those of Budziac, Bialogrod, and Dobrucz, as those of Crim, who the last Year had joyned with the Turks under Peter Waradin, came on the 10th of this Month of Fe∣bruary, and Encamped themselves in the Plains of that Town, which is called the Cracovian Leopolis, with intention to fix his Camp there; and from thence to send out his Parties to all Places, where they could Burn and Spoil, make Slaves, and put all to Fire and Sword; and so they Ravaged every where for the space of eight Days, until at length all the Coun∣tries round being alarm'd hereat, I raised all the Forces that I was able, and brought them together from their respective Quar∣ters, which alas, was a most inconsidera∣ble Power against so Mighty an Enemy; for all that we could gather, and unite, did not amount to more than 3000 fight∣ing Men.

The Day following about Eight of the Clock in the Morning, the Sultan Tartar drew out his Men into form of Battle; and I also having my Confidence in God, drew out that Handful of Men which I had with me, and made a Sally out of the City to cover the Suburbs. The Enemy staid not long to look on us, but seeing some Polish Companies to march boldly against them, they Detached a Party of Tartars to meet and engage them, and to force the Outworks, which were only for∣tified with Hedges, and a kind of Wall made up with Mats and Rushes well wo∣ven together. This Command was exe∣cuted with such Vigour, that doubtless the Place had been carried at the first At∣tack, had not the danger wherein they were of losing their Lives, and Estates, and all they had, made them desperate,

and forced them to make all the resistance that they were able; and in effect they fought like Lyons, receiving the Enemy so bravely, that in a short time all the Fields were covered with the Dead Bodies of the Slain. The Tartars made Thir∣teen Attacks to try their Fortune, and were as often repulsed by the Chri∣stians, without any great loss on their side.

This Fight continued four Hours, un∣til at length the Enemy observing that all their Assaults prevailed little, but were very Bloody, and of great loss, they re∣solved, That at the same time, when they engaged us in the Front with one Party, they should break in upon the Hedge with another, and whatever loss, or Blood it should cost, to carry it by main force, as it immediately proved; for the Enemy having by this means got between us and the City,* 2.2 we remained without any hopes imaginable of relief; howsoever with a Courage full of resolution to overcome, or die like Brave Men, turning our Faces upon them, to whom we had but newly turned our Backs, we did not only over∣come them, but cut a great Number of them in pieces; and after another Engage∣ment, which lasted about two Hours more, drove them out of the Suburbs of the City; tho' in the time of this Fight, the Tartars having set Fire thereunto, the Wind, and Smoak, and Dust did so in∣commode our People, that they were in a manner Blinded, and knew not which course to take; howsoever their Invinci∣ble Courage was such, as that the Enemy was put to Flight.

This Fight continued until Three a Clock in the Afternoon, by which time they had been so beaten, that they were forced to withdraw before the Evening, about a League and a half from the City,* 2.3 and the next Day proceeded on their March; and the third Day passed the Neister, on their way homewards.

The Number of the Slain on the Chri∣stian side did not exceed above 100, and about 160 Wounded; what the Enemy lost, is not to be known.

But such Matters as these, at so far a di∣stance, and between Tartars and Poles, did not much affect, or trouble the Ottoman Court; but such as were nearer hand, as Naval Fights, and the Taking and Reco∣vering of the Island of Scio, being near the Royal Cities, made great noise both in Europe and Asia, and raised the hopes of the People to great and high Expectations of the future Fortune of this New Sultan, as if he had been born to be Restorer of the decaying Condition of the Ottoman Empire.

We have related already the ill Success which the Venetians had had in two several Fights at Sea against the Turks,* 2.4 which be∣ing unusual, and of many Years not known, made it matter of Wonder to all the World. For after the Turks had beaten the Venetian Fleet, all things were put into great Con∣sternation at Scio, so that the Venetian Com∣manders most shamefully abandoned the Place, stealing away in the Night without giving time for some of their Troops which were abroad to guard the Island, to Em∣bark with them, which gave cause to some of their Officers, who thereby became Slaves to the Turks, to vent out Thousands of Imprecations and Curses upon them; and indeed their Case was sad, but Neces∣sity had no Law, for the Venetians had now been beaten twice at Sea by the Turks, who had they followed their Blow, might have utterly destroyed the Venetian Fleet; but the Turks being contented with this unusual Success, a thing not known to them for more than a hundred Years past, were contented with the Flight of the Enemy, and therewith a Cession to them of the whole Island; and the Turks entered trium∣phant thereupon without any Opposition.

The first Act of the Turkish Clemency was to Hang up four Men of the Latine Rite, who were of the Romish Church, and of the Italian Race; namely, Signior Pie∣tro Giustiniani di Antonio, Signior Domenico Stella, who were Deputies, ordained to protect that Religion; Signior Francesco Draco, and Giovanni Castelli di Brecci. Sig∣nior Sofiati, who was Vice-Consul for the English Nation in that Island, fled with his Family, and was well received at Tino: Do∣menico Castelli Son of Vincenzo Castelli, e∣scaped also, (with whom I was well ac∣quainted) together with forty of the chief Families of the Latine Rite, leaving their Possessions, and Moveables behind them: Antonio Rendi happened to be then at Smyr∣na; but his Family deferring their Depar∣ture, his House was Plundered, and all his Estate ruined like that of his Neighbours; for tho' they fled to Smyrna for refuge, by this Revolution the Greeks gained a clear Victory and Ascendant over the Latines: For whereas formerly there were great A∣nimosities between those two Rites; the Latines by reason of their Riches, having the Pope on their side, were always esteem∣ed

the Superiors, and by the great Colle∣ctions made for them, and Legacies be∣queathed, they gained much more of the Hearts and Favour of the Turks, than the Poverty of the Greeks was able to pur∣chase; but now a fair Opportunity hap∣pening of gaining and Confiscating all that appertained to the Latines, they seized on all that belonged to them; treating the Greeks more favourably,* 2.5 because they be∣lieved them to be the less culpable, having the less Riches; and in reality the Greeks having been under the Dominion of the Turks for some Ages, were become almost their Natural Lord, from whom they ex∣pected better Quarter than from the Vene∣tians, or other Italians; and so always wished well to the Turks. Thus was Scio in a short time fallen again into the Hands of the Turks, from whence they are never again likely to recover it, unless the Vene∣tians amend their Politicks, and prove more Vigilant and Brave in the Wars both by Sea and Land; but that is not now to be expected, nor those of the Latines permit∣ted to live in that Island, unless they con∣form to the Rites of the Greek Church, the greatest part of which were restored to the Enjoyment of their Estates, with their Ancient Privileges; but the Latines were deprived of both, by the Instigation of their old Inveterate Enemies the Greeks; tho' at first they were put in hopes of obtaining the like, or equal Favours with them.

After the Death of Sultan Achmet, and that Sultan Mustapha was exalted to the Throne; in the first place Achmet Pasha, Chimacam of Adrianople was Disgraced, and all his Goods and Estate Confiscated to the Use of the Grand Seignior,* 2.6 and he himself made a Prisoner in the Seraglio, but pardoned at the Intercession of the Grand Vizier, and sent Governour to the Island of Mytilene, where I had once a Pa∣sha for a Friend Married to a Sultana, which had like to have cost me dear; but (God be praised) I escaped him without much loss.

In the Place of this Chimacam, the Ni∣sangi Pasha, who sets the Grand Seignior's Firme to certain Writings, was put in his place; and the Vizier's Kahya into the Place of the Nisangi,* 2.7 and Gebegi Ibrahim Aga, was made Kahya.

Upon the Arrival of the Valide Sultana at Adrianople, Iastiff Aga, who had been formerly Kahya to the Hasaki Sultana, or the Royal Queen, was Constituted Aga, or General of the Janisaries, and at the same time Vizier of the Bench: These were succeeded by the Spahyler Agasi, who is General of the Horse, and his Place supplied by a Salakiar of the Sera∣glio.

About the beginning of March, Ymam-Sadè Mahomet Effendi, then Kadilesker of Romelia, was created Mufti by the Grand Seignior; and his Predecessor was sent to Constantinople, from whence the Sultan sent for Mimadi Effendi to be Kadilesker of Anatolia.

The Nakib, who is the Chief of the Green Heads, or those of the Race of Mahomet, was deprived of this Office, and Mahomet Effendi, Kadi of Con∣stantinople, which was as much as Re∣corder of that City, was put into his Place.

In like manner the Tefterdar-Kahyasi, or the Lord Treasurer's Steward, or Se∣cretary, called Galil Effendi, was also chan∣ged, who had been Treasurer in the Time of the foregoing Vizier Ali Pasha; and thus had he formed all his Court accord∣ing to his own Humour and Fancy.

And as to the High and Sublime Offi∣ces Abroad, he began also to form and modelize them: That of Egypt, he Con∣ferred upon Ishmael Pasha, who had been lately Beglerbeg of Damascus; and the Government of this latter he bestowed on the Kadilesker of the Deceased Sultan Achmet.

Hassan Pasha, who was Kinsman to the Queen Regent, late Governour of Scio, was called back to Court from his Banish∣ment at Hatsack, and made the Deputy-Chimacam, or Vikil-Chimacam, to Go∣vern at any time during the Grand Seig∣nior's Absence.

A LIST of such as were put to Death for the late Conspiracy at Adrianople.

• ...
  STRANGLED.
  • BENGLI HASSAN PASHA, late Governour of Tripoli of Soria.
• ...
  BEHEADED.
  • ...Hassan Turcman Agasi.
  • Bester Aga, Salahor of the Grand Seignior.
  • Weli, Aga of the Chimacam.
  • Hassan Effendi, Kahya of the Chimacam.
  • Mutpach Emmini, or Customer.
• ...
  HANGED.
  • An Astrologer.
• ...
  These following were Banished.
  • Fisula Effendi, formerly Mufti, who had been Banished to, and afterwards Exiled into the Upper Egypt.
  • Johaia Effendi, late Kadilescher, sent to Aleppo.
  • Mahomet Effendi Nakib, Banished to Aleppo.
  • Ganziack Effendi, under Kadi of Galata, was sent to Lemnos.
  • As was also Nissani Oglu Hussaein Aga, Favourite to the aforementioned Vizier, Ali Pasha.
  • Besides these, were above a Hundred more Strangled of Inferiour Quality, whose Bodies were thrown into the River Meritz, which runs by Adrianople.

The Valide Sultana being arrived at A∣drianople, was received with open Arms by her Son, who governed himself much by the Measures had been given him by his Mother, who made several Changes and Alterations every Day amongst the Offi∣cers of State; only the Grand Vizier and Mufti continued in their Offices, and the greatest part of the others consisted of Old Servants of the Court, established in the time of his Father Sultan Mahomet IV. of which the Queen-Mother had an Opinion that they would prove the most Faithful Servants of any in the Courr. To make room for these Men, the Chimacam, the Great Master of the Horse to the Sultan, the Chehaya-Bey, or Lieutenant-General of the Janisaries, (who is always more fear∣ed, and esteemed by the Soldiery than the Aga himself) were all displaced, with the Janisar-Aga, as also the Principal Offi∣cers of the Spahees; having an Opini∣on, That the Youngest are always the more Bold, and Daring, their Courages being excited with Ambition, and Vain-Glory.

Things being in this manner modellized both for Domestick and Martial Affairs, the Grand Seignior again confirmed, and published his Resolution to go this Year to the War; and to make Provisions of Money to maintain the same, with the u∣sual Donative to the Soldiery, which was always given in former times, whensoever the Sultan made his first Years Cam∣paign.

Those who were against the Grand Seignior's going in Person to the War, pres∣sed very hard the prevailing Argument of want of Money, to raise which, all means possible were contrived; for the Sultan would not be put by his Resolution, al∣ledging, That the Negligence of his Fa∣ther and Unkle's not going to War in Per∣son, had been the Ruine of the Ottoman Army, and the Cause of all those Losses, and Disgraces which his Empire had su∣stained; but Money must be found by one way or other; to do which, the Grand Vizier was strictly enjoyned to give an Account of Eighteen Millions in the space of Thirty Days, besides the Arrears due

to the Soldiery, in the Time of the last Sultan Achmet: And tho' the Grand Vizier alledged, That it seemed reasonable, that such as had managed the Publick Offices during the two preceding Reigns, should be answerable for the Miscarriages, and not he, who had been employed therein but only some few Months before; yet the Sultan would not admit of this Excuse for a Reason, but required the Account of the Eighteen Millions: His Mother also furnished her Son with Seven Millions and a half in ready Money, and Fifteen Mil∣lions in Jewels, which she had been colle∣cting in the space of fifteen Years that she had been the Wife of his Father; and from the Widow of the late Deceased Sultan Achmet, they took another half Million; the Vizier was Taxed at a Million and a half, and five Millions in Jewels; likewise a good round Sum was demanded from the Chimacam, and other Pasha's and Persons in great Offices.

There was a farther Proposition made to screw Money out of all the Arabians, and Negro's at Court: The Kuzlir-Aga was the first of that Rank from whom the most considerable Sums were exacted; to pay which, their Estates and Faculties sent and conveyed out of sight to Constantinople, were all called from thence.* 2.8 The like was also demanded from the Ulema, and all the Ecclesiastical Lands and Estates were Taxed.* 2.9

To execute all these Contrivances and Ways for raising Money, the Grand Seig∣nior was solely intent, labouring Day and Night to amass Money; and spent his whole time to heap up Riches; to do which, he acted many things without the knowledge of the Vizier, and wrote Let∣ters, and received Answers relating to the raising Men, and providing Subsistence for the Troops without interesting his Grand Vizier therein; the which struck such a Fear and Terrour into the Minds of all those who had to do with the Publick In∣terest, that none durst to act any thing privately, or in an obscure manner, which might be of prejudice to the Grand Seig∣nior, and his Government.

To keep this Sultan in the Humour of going to the War, his Mother laboured to keep up his Spirits; which being observed by the great Men, such as the Mufti, the Grand Vizier, the Lord Treasurer, and the Generals of the Janisaries, and of the Spa∣hees, they all submitted thereunto, only they gave in a Petition to be delivered to the Sultan by the Hand of the Valide Sol∣tana, or Queen-Mother; representing, That since they had observed that it was His Majesty's Resolution to go in Person to the War, they were concurring with him in the same, promising to be helpful therein to the best of their Powers; be∣seeching only, That His Ottoman Majesty would be pleased to Indulge them so much time, as might serve to assemble, and ga∣ther their Militia into a Body, and to make Provisions for their Subsistence, as also Ammunition, and Cannon, with Pow∣der and Bullet sufficient to attend so great an Army: Of all which they gave the Sultan in Writing a particular Account in what forwardness all things were; and concluded, That since it is the Custom of the Germans to be late in the Field, they did not doubt but to be more forward than they, and to Grace and Honour the Sul∣tan's first Expedition with the Success of Glorious Atchievements, of which the Miscarriage would prove of evil Conse∣quence, as the contrary would be of migh∣ty advantage to the whole Ottoman Empire, which languishing after a Fortunate Sultan, would then think the Wheel turned in case they could see the end of a Campaign con∣cluded with Honour of a New Sultan.

The Grand Seignior being sensible here∣of, raised all the Forces he was able, both in Asia and Europe: And to Engage the Tartar Han on his side, certain Aga's were dispatched to Tartary with Purses of Mo∣ney, with Presents of a Sword richly a∣dorned with Diamonds, and with rich Cof∣tans; as also with Presents to the other Kinsmen of the Han, and to the Mirzees, who are the Noble Men, and Chief Offi∣cers both of War and Peace, desiring them all to be early at the War; by which great Assiduity of the Sultan, all the Great Of∣ficers were in fear of him, knowing that as he Rewarded generously, so he Punish∣ed severely.

The Grand Vizier in the mean time considering the Troubles under which he was to labour, as also the Invincible Diffi∣culties of the present War, in case the Sultan should persist in his Resolution of going in Person to Command the Army, he endeavoured what he could to obtain the Favour that he might lay down his Of∣fice, and quietly and safely retire from all Business; for which he made Talkish to the Grand Seignior, which is a Petition made by the Master of Requests; (of which there is but one belonging to the Court called Talkishgee) the substance of which was to lay before the Grand Seignior the impossibility of making the Donative to the Soldiers, amounting unto Twelve Mil∣lions, the which was always given by the Sultans to the Soldiers, whensoever they

made their first Campaign: This was so reasonable an Exception, and Excuse, that there was no reply to be made thereunto, but the absolute Will and Pleasure not to pay it; for besides the want of Money in the Treasury, which had been exhausted by a long and an unfortunate War, the Grand Seignior added, That he did not esteem himself obliged to a Custom which was begun in the most Flourishing Times of the Empire, when Success crowned all their Enterprizes with Victory, when the Ene∣mies were forced to pay all Charges of the War, with an Overplus of Riches and In∣crease, which filled the Royal Exchequer, and that Wars maintained the Empire: But those Days, added the Grand Seig∣nior, are now past; and that it would be an Insolence in the Soldiery, to expect a Donative from him, who was not in the least beholding to them for his being pla∣ced in the Throne, to which he came by Succession,* 2.10 and a Just Title, and not by the Favour and Assistance of the Soldiery; and that whosoever had opposed him there∣in (who was their True and Lawful So∣veraign) would have been guilty of High-Treason, and ought to Die by the Just Laws of the Empire.

In this manner, the Wisest and most Ex∣perienced Officers observing how difficult, and almost impossible it was to divert the Grand Seignior from his Resolution of go∣ing in Person to the War, they all agreed to joyn with their Master, and to applaud his happy Designs, which they prayed to God might be prosperous, promising to give all Assistance with their Lives and For∣tunes, that he might return with Victory and Success: So soon were their Minds changed to the Will and Pleasure of their Absolute and Uncontroulable Lord, that none durst open his Mouth against his Determination, nor no Murmurings heard unless by some few Janisaries, who Talked a little, without any Notice ta∣ken thereof.

The Grand Vizier finding himself also under Invincible Difficulties, thought it the safest way to close with the Sultan, which he accordingly did, and with much outward Zeal dissembled a Chear∣fulness of Spirit in Compliance with his Master.

This Matter being resolved, it was con∣cluded, That an Army should be formed of 80000 Fighting Men, and the Tugh, or Horse-Tail, being with Prayers, after the usual manner, exposed at the Vizier's Gate, the 30th of March was appointed to take the Field, and enter the Tents, which are commonly pitched about two English Miles distant from the Gates: And the Grand Seignior to lose no time, Commanded that 2000 of his Pages, and as many others on Horseback, appointed for his Guard, should be at the appointed time in a readiness to attend the Sultan: But yet things went but slowly on, by rea∣son of the great Discords arisen in Asia,* 2.11 whereby many of the Chief Men had been killed, which gave a stop to the March of the Militia.

To which also another stop was given by the News which the Tartar Han re∣ceived, That the Czar of Muscovy being joyned with the Cossacks, was passing down the Tanais, with design to fall upon Asac; of which he gave Advice to the Grand Seignior, by an Express dispatch∣ed to Adrianople, acquainting him, That the Enemies were grown so numerous, that he could not this Year send his Troops to Hungary, having hard Work to defend his own Country, and People, from so nu∣merous an Army as that of the Muscovites joyned with the Cossacks. But the Grand Seignior not satisfied with this Excuse, re∣turned an Answer, That notwithstanding all Impediments to the contrary, he must by all means come with a Numerous Army, and appear in his Presence; but this was impossible to be done, the Soldiers and People not being contented to please the Grand Seignior to see their Country laid open, and exposed to such a Powerful E∣nemy.

This Grand Seignior Sultan Mustapha, when he came first to the Throne, was Feared, Esteemed, Loved, and Obeyed; but the Affection of his People was soon estranged from him,* 2.12 since he Deposed the late Mufti, and caused the Grand Vizier, with many other Persons, Innocent and Worthy, to be Strangled, with Ignominy and Dishonour. But the Mufti was most of all lamented, having the Reputation of a Just, Sincere, Honest, and a Holy Man, in whose place the Sultan established his late Hogia, or School-Master, named Fei∣zulah Effendi, a Wicked, False, Perfidious, and Covetous Wretch, as he was general∣ly esteemed to be.

The Grand Vizier, (as we have said) was always affraid of the Changeable Hu∣mour of the Sultan, and could not cover his Passion, nor dissemble his Countenance; of which the Sultan taking notice, depri∣ved him of his Office, and Banished him at Midnight to Chisme, which is a small Vil∣lage on the Coast of Anatolia over against Scio; but this Proscription continued not long, before he was brought back again to Adrianople, and Strangled, and his Body

flung out at the Seraglio-Gate, where it remained until the next Day at Noon, with the Face and Beard all besmeared with a —

At Adrianople all the Court was chang∣ed; only the Grand Seignior when he first entered upon the Throne, confirmed the Janisar-Aga in his Place, who was an Ho∣nest Man, and a good Soldier, but soon afterwards he put him out, and Constitu∣ted another in his Place, called Baltagée Deli, which signifies Mad Battle-Axe Man, the Son of an Armenian Renegade, a Vile Fellow, without Sence, or Manners: Like∣wise the Kahya-Bey, or Lieutenant-Ge∣neral of the Janisaries; and the Kuzlir-Aga, or Eunuch of the Women were dis∣placed; and in short since this Sultan came to the Throne, there was nothing done but placing and displacing of the Principal Officers; all which was acted by the Coun∣sels of Women, and Favourites in the Se∣raglio, who neither had Sence, nor Expe∣rience in the Affairs of the World. The like soon after happened to the Chimacam, who being a Friend to the late Vizier, and one of his Creatures, was Banished first to Mytilene, where he was likewise Stran∣gled; from whence his Head being brought to Adrianople, was thrown before the Ga••e of the Seraglio, with divers others esteem∣ed Innocent by the People.

Thus the Sultan, as he thought, having purged his Army of Cowards, and his Counsels of Ill-affected Ministers, began his March from Adrianople on the 10th of June;* 2.13 the Janisar-Aga marched away on the 3d: The Army was said to be very powerful, and composed of Choice Men, which so encouraged the Turks, that they talked of nothing less than the taking of Buda; and about that time News came from Stalida de Zetuns, a small Island near Negropont, That Ibrahim, Pasha of that Island, had entered into the Morea with 30000 Men, and was Encamped under Corinth, expecting the Captain-Pasha, who was then designing to depart from Constan∣tinople in ten Days, where he had been detained longer than was usual, to repair the Damages which the Turks had received in their late Engagement against the Vene∣tians: Belonging to this Fleet, seven Ships were appointed for Alexandria to fetch Soldiers thence for the Morea; and like∣wise about this time Recruits were sent to the Black-Sea to several Ports there, the Turks being in fear of the Moscovites, who being very strong, the Tartars were affraid to encounter them, and would have ex∣cused themselves this Year from the War, but the Sultan would not hearken there∣unto, but proceeded with Resolution on his March.

But before the Sultan began the same, he caused the Tallol, or Common-Cryer, to make Publication, That the Grand Seignior's Will and Pleasure was,

That no Man going to the Wars,* 2.14 should be served by Young Boys.

That good Order and Discipline should be observed in the March.

That no Man should ride out of the Common High-Road, or by Bye-Ways, into the Corn-Fields, or Vine-yards, or other Grounds belonging to the Hus∣band-Man.

In pursuance of these Commands, the Sultan on the very Day that he departed from the Camp before Adrianople, being then Teptil, or in Disguise, he found a Man cutting another's Corn to give his Horse; and only asking him, Whether he had heard of the Grand Seignior's Com∣mand? He ordered the Selictar-Aga, who was General of the Spahee's, for he had no other with him (excepting the Kapugi∣ler-Kahyase) at the same time to kill him, which he presently executed with his Lan∣cet, not giving the Unhappy Wretch one Moment to speak for his Life.* 2.15 At the same time also, the Grand Seignior espyed another walking through the Corn, whom he took and carried to the Tents, where he caused his Head to be cut off. The Topgibashee, or Master of the Ordnance, likewise the Day or two before very hard∣ly escaped; for having a Boy in his Com∣pany, of whom the Grand Seignior had some Jealousie, or ill Thoughts, had cer∣tainly been put to Death for the same, had he not had some present Witnesses at hand to prove him to be his Son.

These and such like Acts of Severity, rendered this Sultan very formidable, so that all People were afraid of him, not on∣ly in their Publick Actions, but even in their Private Conversation, scarce trusting their own Thoughts. Amongst these Se∣verities Achmet Pasha, late Chimacam to Sultan Achmet, was turn'd out of his Of∣fice by this present Sultan, and Banished to Mytilene; and after having taken from him an hundred Purses of Money, his Head was brought to Adrianople, about two Days after the Vizier had been Stran∣gled.

All things being now prepared for the March of the Army towards Belgrade, the Janisar-Aga with his Janisaries, according

to the usual Custom took the Van, and marched away one Days March before the rest of the Army, so that the Grand Seig∣nior, attended by the Mufti, Grand Vi∣zier, Spahilar-Aga, or General of the Spa∣hees, Tefterdar, or Lord-Treasurer, be∣gan their March, following the Janisaries, on the 20th of June,* 2.16 but after some few Hours, they made a Halt to give time to three of the greatest Pashas, or Begler∣beys of the Empire, to come up with them; that is to say, to the Pasha of Da∣mascus, the Pasha of Aleppo, and Beglerbey of Anatolia, every one of which brought with him about 1200 Men, recounting Spahees, and Sarigiaus, and Segmen on Horseback, with all which and others at∣tending the Sultan in his March, they did not amount to more than 12000 Horse, with which he marched from Adrianople in six Days to Philippopolis, and Encamped o∣ver against that City in those Plains, where a great Council of War was held, touch∣ing the Methods which were to be obser∣ved in the War, and the Places which were to be Attacked.

The Numbers of this Army appeared so small and inconsiderable, that the Sultan remained very much unsatisfied, and would not be contented, unless the Tartar Han would follow him with all his Force unto the Camp at Belgrade; but he positively refused it; and said, That it could not be done; unless he should expose, and lay his People open to the Incursions of the Mus∣covites, who were coming down in vast Numbers to over-run all the Regions of the Tartars: Howsoever not to displease overmuch the Grand Seignior, the Tartar Han forced himself to appear in the Tur∣kish Camp with an Army of about 5000 Tartars, which was a good addition to the Turkish Force, so that in all they composed an Army of about 50000 Men.

The Christian Army led by the Elector of Saxony, was not much stronger, but ve∣ry desirous to meet the Turks, who had taken their March towards Transylvania: But in regard the Turks were so far advan∣ced before the Imperial Army, that it was impossible for the Elector to come in op∣portunely, and in season to succour the Places which the Sultan designed to Invest, unless they could take a shorter way, which was offered unto them, being guided by some of that Country; but the Ways pro∣ved so bad, being all Marshes and Wet Grounds, that it was impossible to pass them with the Cannon and heavy Baggage of an Army; so that after great Fatigues of three or four Days Marches, the Ele∣ctor was obliged to return back again to his former Camp; and in the mean time the Turks had got such a way before them towards Transylvania, that it was impossi∣ble for them to be overtaken by the Chri∣stian Army; and having liberty to rove every where without any Opposition equal to them, they fell in upon the Palanca of Lippa on the 7th of September,* 2.17 without Breast-works, or Parapets, or any Ap∣proaches, Defence, or Shelter before them, but only with the Scimiter in their Hands, they Attacked the Palanca at four several Places, with such incredible Resolution, that after four Hours Engagement, they took the Place by Storm, and put all to the Sword, excepting only Major Toldo, who was Governour of the Place, with some others of the Principal Officers, whom the Turks after their usual Custom, reser∣ved to carry in Triumph, and to show them to the People at the Port, as one Signal of their Victory.

In the mean time the Imperial Army continued their March near to Chonad, si∣tuate upon the River Maros; and on the 13th of that Month, pitched their Camp before Natla, where they reposed that Day, and the 14th marched directly to Lippa, hoping to overtake the Turks, and to come time enough to Attack the Enemy, and relieve the Place, but they found it too late, and the Turks reinforced with an Ar∣my of 6000 Tartars, Commanded by the Han in Person: This News gave a stop to the March of the Imperial Army under the Command of the Elector of Saxony; and what was most discouraging, was the News, That the Turks lead by the Sultan himself in Person were marched into Tran∣sylvania,* 2.18 to Attack Count Veterani in his Camp, which consisted not of above 6500 Men; who tho' they were very well for∣tified, and Resolute Men, and good Sol∣diers, yet being too unequal a Match for the whole Turkish Army, which consisted of 18000 Janisaries, and 40000 Spahees, they were all cut off, with the most part of their Officers, and as to General Vete∣rani himself he was shot through the Body with a Musquet-Bullet, and cut over the Head with a Scimiter; notwithstanding which, he being still alive, Endeavours were used for his Recovery, but he Died of his Wounds.

This ill News was followed by the un∣fortunate Loss of Titul, which the Turks having Attacked by Land and Water with 15000 Men, the Place Surrendered it self to the Turks by Treaty, in vertue of which the Garrison consisting of 1600 Men, ought according to Articles, to have been Con∣voyed to Peter Waradin; but the Turks re∣turning

after they had Burnt, and Aban∣doned the Place, carried all the Garrison with them to Salankement.

This Place was taken by the Turks, be∣fore that General Herberville, who was Encamped with 6000 Men near Kobila, as also fortified with 8 Galleys and 16 Frigats, could hinder the Enemies Approaches: After which the Turks leaving the Place, the Imperialists entered into the same, and took Possession of all what the Turks had ruined, for nothing was left but heaps of Rubbish.

In the mean time the great Army under the Command of the Elector of Saxony, advanced so far as Solnak, where the Grand Seignior having received intelligence, That the Christian Army was marching towards him, hastned with all speed for Temeswaer, with intention to enter into Sclavonia: Upon which the Elector of Saxony made a Halt, and on the 17th marched back, and pitched his Camp about half an Hours di∣stance from Chonad; and the next Day be∣ing the 18th, continued his March as far as Mokoua. But whereas Advices came, That the Enemy designed to enter Transyl∣vania, the Elector resolved to send all the Infantry to Peter Waradin, whilst he in Person, marched with the Horse to op∣pose the Enemy, giving Commands to the National Militia of Sclavonia to joyn with the Croats, to oppose the Entrance of the Turks into that Province: And here it was, that certain Intelligence was given of the Defeat of that Worthy General Veterani, and that he was dead of his Wounds; which News was received with much grief of all Brave and Worthy Champions for the Christian Cause.

After which Count Heisler took the Van of the Army, and marched before them for Deva, there to provide all sorts of Pro∣visions for sustenance of those who were to follow and to assemble the Estates of Tran∣sylvania, commanding them to meet His Electoral Highness, and consult with him in the best manner, how things might be put into a posture of Defence for the Safe∣ty and Security of that Province. At which time also came the unhappy News of the loss of Titul taken by the Turks.

It was the common Opinion at that time of all the well experienced Soldiers, That the Martial Affairs of the Empire, were all very ill managed for that Year: For had the Christians instead of Ingulsing themselves amongst Marasses and Moorish Grounds unpassable for an Army, in which they lost six or seven Days, and gave the Turks the advantage of marching so many Days before them to Temeswaer, and thence to Lippa, they had saved the loss of Vete∣rani and his Forces at Lugos, as also Titul, and Karansebes, all which fell that Year for want of good Conduct; for the Turks were esteemed not stronger at that time than 40000 Men, and one half of them Raw and Undisciplined Soldiers;* 2.19 but the Slowness, and Negligence of the Christians in that Years Expedition, broke all Mea∣sures, as if there had been a Fatality at∣tending this Years Actions: For no sooner did the Turks understand that the Imperial Army was marching after them, but being struck with a suddain Consternation, they Decamped with their whole Army from Lippa, more like Cowards flying before the Enemy, than in Order and Posture of War, marching Day and Night to get in∣to Temeswaer before the Enemy could over∣take them. But so soon as it was known to the Turks, that the Imperial Army was marched to Segedin, they took Courage, and gave a stop to their precipitate Flight. And here it was that Fortune changed, and gave unexpected Success to the Turks in this Years Expedition, which turned great∣ly to the Fame and Renown of this New Sultan Mustapha: For considering that he was but a raw Soldier, and kept himself in every Action at a distance and out of Musket-shot, yet the whole matter being carried on against the Opinion of all his Ministers, and the Inclinations of almost all his Soldiers, especially the Janisaries, and all the prime Officers of the Army and the State, things looked at first with a ve∣ry bad Face, and promised nothing but Destruction.

Yet afterwards succeeding quite other∣wise than were expected, all was attribu∣ted to the Courage, Wisdom, and Conduct of the Sultan; so that it became a Wonder to the World how it was possible for a Sul∣tan without Experience, who had but new∣ly come out from an Imprisonment of eight Years, and known nothing yet of War, to be attended with such Success, that all his Army did avow, That his Victories were due to his Valour and Conduct, which gained him a wonderful Esteem amongst all the great Men of his Empire, both Martial and Civil; the Effect of which was found in the following Year,* 2.20 when all the Sol∣diery being flushed with Blood and Spoil, came willingly to the War, and struck an Awe and Fear into the Hearts of all the Ottoman Subjects, believing this Prince to be sent them from God, to rescue them and the Empire from Ruine and utter De∣solation.

The Sultan being sensible of the great Honour and Fame which he had gained by the unexpected Successes of this Campaign, being unwilling to lose the same, so soon as he heard that the Imperial Army was marched towards Transylvania, he resolved to return homewards, and not to tempt Fortune again for this Year, and accord∣ingly marched again with his whole Army to Temeswaer, whence he sent Commands and Decrees one after the other, with Let∣ters to Ziafer the Pasha of Belgrade, to pro∣vide Temeswaer with all sorts of Victuals necessary for maintenance of the Place; and that he should take care to send them thi∣ther, with a Convoy sufficient to defend them from the Enemy: And farther he ordered that Pasha to take notice, That he was returning to his Palace at Adrianople, by the way of Walachia, of which Ad∣vice was given to the Prince, and Com∣mands sent him to repair the Bridges, and mend the Ways of that Country, and to enlarge them for the more easie Passage of the Army:* 2.21 The like Decrees and Com∣mands were sent to the Prince of Moldavia; and divers Letters were Wrote by the Grand Seignior himself to his Mother the Valide Soltana; as also to all the Chief Governors of the Provinces in Anatolia, and to the Chimacams of Constantinople and Adrianople; in which, after he had recount∣ed unto them all his great Actions and Suc∣cesses, he Commanded that Days and Nights of Rejoycings should be celebrated for the same through all the Dominions of his Empire, in regard that he had Taken, and laid Desolate a greater City and Ter∣ritory than that of Belgrade, and that he had slain more than 10000 Germans, and made above 3000 Prisoners, with the Offi∣cers belonging to them; for which Glori∣ous Victories and Fortunes Commands were given to offer Thanksgivings in all Places of the Empire, and to praise God, for that he had been pleased to appease his Wrath against the Musselmen, who had long provoked the Divine Anger.

The Sultan being in this manner resolved to make his Return to Adrianople, by way of Walachia, notice was given thereof (as we have said) to the Prince of the Coun∣try, who was thereby put into a most grievous Terrour and Consternation of Mind, not knowing what to do, or how to help and protect his Poor Miserable Province already wasted and consumed by the War; and what was now to be more done on the Passage of divers Asiaticks, Al∣banians, Turks, &c. was not to be resolved; until the Prince considering, and revolving all things in his Mind, concluded, That the best and safest way was, immediately to depart and meet the Sultan on his way, according to his urgent and reiterated Commands; shewing no Fears or Jealousies, but a Confidence of the Grand Seignior's Favour to him: In pursuance of which, he proceeded, and met the Sultan over against Widin; where being seen by him, and looked upon with a tender Eye,* 2.22 and a kind Aspect, the poor Prince began to take Courage, and ease the Throbs of his Trem∣bling Heart. Howsoever being acquaint∣ed with the Humour of the Sultans, who often speak fair to their Pasha's, and yet nourish a secret Design to take away their Lives, he could not settle his Thoughts, or believe that the bitterness of Death was yet over; but there was nothing to be done now, nor any starting back, but on he must go, as he did to the Place called Turno on this side of the Danube, over against Nicopolis, where the Army Encamped on the 13th of October, and the Sultan took some Repose for certain Days, called by the Turks Days of Otoracke, the Officers of the Prince proceeding in the mean time to prepare the Ways, and to make them wider.

The Grand Seignior coming very weary to Turno, reposed there about an Hours time, and then Embarking in his own Boat, passed to the other side of the Danube, af∣ter which the Grand Vizier followed with the whole Army, there being Boats and Floats sufficient to Ferry them over. And here it is to be for ever recorded to the ho∣nour of this Sultan Mustapha, That in pas∣sing this Province of Walachia, strict Dis∣cipline was kept, and which was observed with so much Rigour, that a Soldier durst not steal an Egg, a Pullet, or a Hen; and a Tartar was known to be Hanged,* 2.23 for ta∣king away a Kid by force; and two Asia∣tick Turks were Hanged on a Tree for Rob∣bing a Bee-hive, by which Severity, to the Wonder of the whole World, the Ottoman Army passed that Afflicted Province with∣out the least damage or hurt to the Peo∣ple.

And here at this place of Turno, it is to be noted, That before the Grand Seignior passed the River, he called to him the Prince of Walachia, and bestowed upon him a rich Coftan, or Vest, which is a Sig∣nal of the Favour of the Sultan, and told him, That he was greatly pleased and sa∣tisfied with his Service and Diligence, com∣manding him to return Home to his Place of Residence, but above all he charged him to observe Justice, which if he did, he should always enjoy his Favour; the like said the Grand Vizier to him, who giving

him a Vest as an Evidence of his Favour, gave him licence to return to his own place of Government.

When the Turks were come on the Con∣fines over against Fetihlam, they Embark∣ed all their Cannon and Ammunition for Belgrade; but the lighter Field-pieces, (of which they found some in Karansebes) they carried with them, to render their Entry into Adrianople, the more Stately and Mag∣nificent.

But whilst they were contriving all things for the more Triumpant Entry of the Grand Seignior; it was judged most requisite and proper for the present State of the Turkish Affairs, to make the Triumph into Con∣stantinople, which was ever esteemed the Head of the Empire, and the Place where the Ottoman Throne was ever seated: And as to Adrianople, it was ordered, that the Sultan should make a short stop there of four or five Days only; and in the mean time the Valide Soltana, with all the Fe∣male Court, was ordered to take up their Quarters in the usual Places of the Great Seraglio, which was prepared on all sides to be fitted for Reception of the Grand Seignior.

* 2.24This coming of the Grand Seignior to Constantinople, was a suddain Resolution, and unexpected, being the effect of his Thoughts on his March, only for consi∣dering that Constantinople (ever since the Turks entered into Europe) was always e∣steemed the Head and Seat of the Ottoman Empire, and the Place where the Ottoman Emperors were ever Enthroned with the Benediction of the Mufti, assisted by the Nakib, who is Chief of the Emirs, who wear green Tulbants; and also the Place where the Mufti girds the Sword to the Sultan's Thigh, called St. Juob, in Memo∣ry of that Soldier, who was the first that stormed the Walls of Constantinople, when it was in the Possession of the Greeks; for which reason, his Memory hath ever been held in great Veneration with the Turks. The Thoughts whereof incited the Grand Seignior with a sort of Impatience and Am∣bition to imitate the Practice of his Ance∣stors, at a time when he esteemed himself Great, Prosperous, and in a way to reco∣ver the lost Honour and Reputation of the Empire.

Moreover, his Design being to be as great at Sea as at Land, or at least of equal Match with the Venetians, or to have a better Army to enter into the Morea, and recover the Country, his Thoughts were fixed upon Constantinople, as the proper Place for that Design; as Adrianople was for the Wars by Land so no time was lost in the March of the Army, to possess the Ancient Seat of the Osmanlees.

The Grand Seignior having reposed some few Days (as we have said) at Adrianople, proceeded forwards and arrived in Compa∣ny with his Mother at Constantinople, tho' at first it was appointed otherwise, and that she should go first, and lead the way; but it afterwards seemed more Great and Glo∣rious, and of less Charge to go together, which accordingly they did, and arrived at the Great Seraglio about the latter end of October, or beginning of November: But on the Road the Court and Army happen∣ing to feel some Scarcity and Want of Pro∣visions, the Sultan became very angry and displeased against the Treasurer of the Ar∣my, and against those Officers whose Busi∣ness it was to Oversee the Provisions, and not to suffer any Want to be in Court or Army: Upon which Occasion, the Grand Seignior Discharged the Tefterdar of his Office, with Threats and Menaces of his Life: And the Commissaries for that Busi∣ness being in like manner faulty, as also the second Person under the Tefterdar, was Discharged of his Office, and great care was taken to supply their Offices with Men of Skill and Industry.

And now about the beginning of this Month of November,* 2.25 * 2.26 the Grand Seignior with all his Court, entered into the Capital City of his Residence, with such Applause and Triumph, and Joy of the People, that the like was never heard or known in the Time of any former Sultan, all which ser∣ved to comfort the People, and encourage the Militia.

Amongst the Particulars of this Tri∣umph, 300 Slaves were shown, and all represented for Great Generals and Cap∣tains; for tho' there were but very few Officers amongst them, yet they were gi∣ven out for such, and for German Princes: All the light Cannon, and Field-Pieces, with the Ammunition, Colours, Flags, Drums, and Trumpets, were all showed, and brought into the Account of Spoil; with a Report amongst the Soldiery, That the Turks had not lost above 500 Men, kil∣led in the Field, tho' others of them which came out of the Army, and had been Eye-Witnesses of the whole Battel, and of the Turkish Army, which consisted of 50000 Men, with the Sultan at the Head of them, and yet were hard put to it to fight against 8000 of Veterani's Men; who having maintained a Fight for six Hours, were at length forced to retire for want of Powder and Ammunition, and other Warlike Pro∣visions.

Thus much the Turks, who had been in the Battel, confessed themselves; whilst others who came from all the Countries round to see the Show, and Triumph, Wept for Joy, saying, That the Time was now come, that God would Avenge himself on the Christians, for their Pride; and would for the future blind them in their Designs, and infatuate them in all their Counsels.

Howsoever all the World cannot but confess, That the loss of so many Brave Men, could not but prove a fatal Blow to all Christendom, especially to the Germans, who fought almost to the last Drop of Blood: Nor were the Turks unsensible of their Losses also, both as to Numbers and Quality; for one of the Sultan's Brothers-in-Law,* 2.27 called Sahin Mehmet Pasha, a brisk daring Man, and a good Soldier, and so Named from Sahin, which signifies a Fal∣con, and was the next to the Grand Vizier, and carried three Horse-Tails gilded before him, was killed by a Carbine-shot; for which reason he was much lamented at the Court, and most especially by the Queen-Mother, not only because he had been her Son-in-Law, but a Person endued with many Rare and Excellent Vertues: Besides which, the famous Mahmud Pasha, Celebrated by all to be one of the most Accomplished Soldiers of this Age, and the most Warlike Cavalier of all the Otto∣man Nation: He was an Albanian Born, a Man of great Reputation and Fame, called Mahmud Bei Oghli, and was slain with three Carbine-shots, and fell amongst the most Renowned Officers of the Turks: These two were said to be the first who broke into Veterani's Army, one to the Right, and the other to the Left-Wing, where they found and encountred such unexpe∣cted Opposition, that the Turks confessed, That they had never met the like, and had not prevailed against their Enemies at that time, had it not been for the Resoluti∣on and Bravery of their Fortunate Sultan, who standing in the Rear with his Scimi∣ter in his Hand, hindered the base intend∣ed Flight of his Soldiery.

This Action gave a full stop to all the following Designs of this Year; for the Turks reasoning with themselves, That in case so small an Army as that of Veterani, was able to do such Feats, what would be∣come of their Forces, were they to engage against the whole entire Army of the Kral, that is the Elector; for they call the King of Poland Kral, and so other Inferiour Princes to the Emperor, whom they call Kaisar; but the King of England, they could never be taught to call otherwise than Kral.

The Grand Seignior having made his Triumphant Entry into Constantinople, the Militia of Asia which attended the Sultan from the War, had licence given them to return Home to their own Countries, and Orders were given to open a Door, as they call it, to enroll Janisaries, according to the usual Ceremonies used on those Occasions, and care was taken to Arm them, as well the New Janisaries as the Old Veterane Albanian Troops; as also the Levents, or Marine Regiments, and to recruit their Numbers, of which several had been lost in the late Engagements at Sea; the which, tho' they had not for many Years been fought with so much equality of For∣tune between the Venetians and the Turks, as they had been for this Year, yet it was not determined which side had gained the better; tho' the Turks avoided the Fight, so much as was possible, and thereby gave an evidence of their own Weakness, and doubtful Condition.

It hath been long since we have heard a∣ny Discourse of Tekely,* 2.28 being not regard∣ed so much by any as by the French Am∣bassador; for as to the Turks, they had no Opinion of him, nor would they have it be thought that they had any need of his Forces, or Interest of his Party in Hunga∣ry; but suffered him to Lodge in one of the vilest Streets in the Town, amongst Jews, and the meaner sort of the Arme∣nians, called Balata; his Countenance was much changed, pale, and fallen, and his Feet Swelled, so that his Enemies scorned him, and his Friends could expect nothing more of good from him.

The Year drawing now towards an end, all the Endeavours of the Turks were to be∣gin the following Year with greater Forces than that of the preceding; and herein they were the more concerned, in regard of the Moscovites, who were coming down upon the Tartars with vast Numbers of Soldiers, and all things prepared to make War upon them, and to take Asac, at least the Diversion hereby would be great, and so employ the Tartars, that to defend their own Countries, they would be obliged to desert the Service and Cause of the Turks: Howsoever the Successes of the Turks had been this Year so great, as gave them cou∣rage to consider in what manner they might be able to form two Armies for the next; with one of which the chief Design was to enter Transylvania, and if possible, to make Peace with the Moscovites by the Negoti∣ations of the Tartars; but all this came to nothing, as we shall see by the Sequel of the following Year.

Anno 1696.

[ 1696] THO' the Turks had gained some ad∣vantage the last Year over the Vene∣tians both by Sea and Land; namely, in the Recovery of Scio, and by giving a Check or Stop to the Venetian Fleet; yet they gained little more thereby, than some little Fame and Reputation to the present Sultan Mustapha, whom the People began to consider, as a Deliverer sent to them from Heaven to recover their almost lost Empire, which lay under sad Distresses as well in Asia as in Europe.

This Opinion of the People when they observed the Justice, the Courage, and the Resolution of this Sultan to go in Person to the War, and that nothing could divert him from it, gave them Courage and As∣surance to expect a turn of Fortune, and hopes of better Successes for the future; and tho' the French promised them not to make Peace without them, but to joyn with them in a perpetual League of Friendship; yet the Turks did not much trust them, but kept a watchful Eye over them, know∣ing very well how little stress there is to be laid on the Promises of the Great Mo∣narch of France, who was also equally Jealous of the Faith of the Turks, and both of them equally doubtful of one ano∣ther.

This Great Ottoman Empire had the last Year changed both their Master, and the Chief Officers, without any considerable Change, or Troubles in the State amongst themselves, for that this Sultan, in whom clearly appeared a Spirit of greater Wisdom and Courage than in his Father Mahomet IV, or in his Uncle's succeeding him, gave the Soldiery and the People such Hopes and Expectations from him, that none durst open his Mouth, or lift up his Hands a∣gainst him; there appeared also something more of Justice and Vertue in him, and of Diligence, and Care, and Sedulity in his Business, than was found in his Father, or in any of the succeeding Uncles, as we have formerly said; which gave hope to the great Governors of the Empire, that under him the Losses which the Empire had su∣stained in these last Wars, might be repair∣ed; for tho' the Recovery of the Isle of Scio was made before he came to the Throne, and consequently might be looked upon, as an effect of his Uncle's Counsels; for that Mustapha did not enter upon the Government until the end of January 1695, when that Scio had been taken about a Month before by the Turks; but that fal∣ling so near to the time that Mustapha came to the Throne, that piece of good Fortune was looked upon as an effect of the Wis∣dom of the New Emperor, rather than of the Uncle Achmet's Counsel, by which, and by some other Exploits of the preceding Year in 1695, Mustapha grew high in the Opinion of the People, and the Soldiery; to which some Successes being added, as the taking of Titul and Lippa, with the De∣feat given to Veterani; for which the Turks paid very dear, and would not have been cried up for a Victory, had not Victories become very rare in those Days; their Hopes were very big, and that he might make these Actions the more Triumphant and Glorious, the Grand Seignior dispatch∣ed away several Messengers to the Kings of Persia, and the Princes of Arabia, and to other Tributaries, to communicate unto them all his Successes and Victories of the last Year, whereby he hoped to encourage the drooping Spirits of his own Soldiers, and confirm those of his Friends and Al∣lies unto him.

The Loss of Scio was certainly not very considerable to the Venetians at that time after they had gained it from the Turks; for Conquests at such a distance from them can never turn to any Account, or bene∣fit.

The Morea indeed may be a more useful Conquest, than any of those on the Coast of Asia, where the Turks are far stronger than on the Coast of Europe, and this Year also the Venetians had been most successful in those Parts of the Morea, having Defeat∣ed the Turks there in all their Attempts, in this as well as several other Years; but these Successes are not likely to be conti∣nued, for unless the Venetians increase the Number of their Ships at Sea, and aug∣ment their Forces at Land; and make good choice of their principal Commanders; all Matters will probably go backwards; for such Generals as Morosini and Konismarc are not easily to be found, under whom all things thrived and prospered, so that it were now to be wished, that the Venetian Forces were more numerous than former∣ly, and composed of their own Subjects, rather than of Foreigners.

But the Turks had a more watchful Eye over their War in Hungary, and the Parts about Belgrade, and Transylvania, than ei∣ther in Asia, or other Countries of Eu∣rope, or over the Province of Bassora, or Basorat, of which the Arabians had made a late Conquest over the Turkish Basha of that Country, who having but 2000 Men with him, was forced to submit to the

greater force of the Arabs, and upon his Surrender made a Capitulation with them, That he might pass into Persia, where he was well received at Ispahan by the King, being a Wise Man, and a Soldier.

About the same time likewise Solyman Bey, a Turk, a Native of Curdistan, having routed a Party of Persians on the Frontiers, had a Commission given him by the Grand Seignior, to do all the Mischief he was a∣ble on the Frontiers of Persia, not on the Persians only, but on the Georgians and Arabians, who had joyned together and made themselves Princes of those Provin∣ces.

* 2.29Nor did the Affairs of the Turks prosper better at that time in the Morea, where a strong Party of the Venetian Forces made an Irruption upon the Turks, and advan∣ced so far as Thebes, where the Turks re∣ceived an entire Defeat, all the Country being Spoiled, Plundered, and Sacked by the Venetians, who upon their return car∣ried with them a great Booty, with vast Numbers of Turkish Slaves.

Whilst these Matters were transacting, the Sultan was diligently employed at the Port in forming a Numerous Army, and providing all things for the Support and Maintenance of them. Nor was the like Diligence wanting in preparing and setting forth their Fleet, and putting them into a posture capable to Fight and Engage the Venetians; but as to the Land-Forces, the Campaign of this Year began early in the Month of May, when the Heydukes in di∣vers places of Sclavonia, assembled them∣selves in a Body to the Number of 400 Men, with which they passed the Save, and made an Inroad so far as Nissa, about eight or nine Days to the Eastward of Belgrade, and in that March, they drove away great Numbers of small and great Cattle; after which they contrived in what manner to make their Retreat; but as they thought thereupon, the Garrisons of Belgrade, and other Neighbouring Places, made a Sally out upon them with a Party of about 2000 Men, Horse and Foot, who being in∣formed of the Enemies Design, they drew up so advantagiously in a Wood, and re∣ceived them with so great Bravery, that after several Repulses given them, in which great Numbers were Killed and Wounded, were at length forced to fly and quit the Field, whilst the Sclavonians made good their Retreat, and proceeded happily in their Design, which is all the Prologue that was made to the succeeding Actions of the following Campaign; only every thing began then to dispose it self towards a Bloody War, and for Action of the follow∣ing Year: When the Duke of Lorain made his first Campaign in Hungary in Quality of Major-General of the Imperial-Army, Commanding in particular the Regiments of St. Croix, de Commerci, and Bassompierre, in which Commands this Young Prince e∣videnced to the World, a clear Inclination, and Disposition to the War, agreeable to the Mind of his Illustrious Ancestors.

Whilst things were thus preparing in Hungary, News came to the Port from Di∣arbekir, giving the Relation of a Fight be∣tween the Rebels in those Parts, and the Turks, in which the Turks had been De∣feated, and their General,* 2.30 the Pasha of Di∣arbekir, put to Flight, at a Place not far from Sivas: The Particulars of which suc∣ceeded in this manner.

When the Pasha heard where the Rebels were Encamped, he presently marched a∣gainst them with a Body of 3600 Horse, Commanding two other Pashas with a force of 2000 Horse more to fall upon the Re∣bels, and getting between them began to Kill and Destroy them without giving Quarter to any of them: The Rebels ha∣ving had timely notice of this Motion of the Pasha's, they mounted their Horses with much Courage and Activity, towards the Evening, and taking a Round about the Mountain, by favour of the Moon, they marched all that Night, and in the Morning early they fell in with the Turkish Seraskier, or General, with their Swords,* 2.31 or Scimyters, and with their Pikes and Lances, whence arose a very Bloody Fight, which held for the space of two Hours, to the great loss and diminution of the Army of the Turks, and danger of the Pasha's Life, who being put into great fear quit∣ted the Field and fled, leaving the Spoil to the Enemy; with which they being en∣couraged, they marched towards Aleppo, and from thence exacted what Money and Provisions that rich Province could afford them, upon pain of Military Execution; at which the Sultan was so enraged, that he gave out present Orders to raise the Ne∣firan, which is the Militia of the Eastern Countries; and like one Man to rise and joyn themselves against the Enemy. Be∣sides which, many other things were to be done, both by Sea and Land, and that with all Expedition, in regard that the force of the Rebels growing daily greater, their Power would with much more diffi∣culty be subdued.

And in regard there was a necessity of putting the Fleet to Sea with all expediti∣on, all other Affairs were laid aside, until that was dispatched, which was performed

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

after the Biram, and then about the be∣ginning of May the Sultan began his March towards Hungary at the Head of his Army, when several were of Opinion that due care should be taken to suppress the Re∣bels in Asia; but the Sultan would hear of nothing more than to raise the Nefiran of the Country upon them, which are a sort of Soldiers like our Trained-Bands, and not better exercised in the Wars.

The Sultan who intended to have brought this Year 80 or 100000 Men in∣to the Field against the Emperor, was con∣tented to fall short at least 10000 Men of that Number which he had the last Year: And in regard the Asiatick Soldiers could not, or would not leave their own Coun∣try to attend the Armies in Hungary; the whole Army of the Turks did not amount to more than 50000 Men; and scarcely to that neither considering the Diversions made on one side by the Persians, and by the Muscovites on the other; wherefore considering these Difficulties and Distresses, all the Ottoracks were called to the Wars, being in the Nature of Milites immeriti, who after their long Services in the War, have liberty given them to withdraw to their own Homes, with two Pence or three Pence a Day, which is called a dead Pay; and of these there may be about 40000 Men, which may be some Addition to the Number of the Turkish Army, and with these the Turks were now obliged to help themselves.

But to understand more distinctly the Transactions and Progress of all the Turkish Affairs both by Sea and Land for this Year following,

In the first place we are to take notice, That in the Month of March of this Year,* 2.32 30 Frigats were dispatched for Asac, which soon afterwards were followed by eight Gallies.

As to the Land Matters, March the 28th the Grand Seignior and Grand Vizier made their Alloy to their Tents, which were pitched as usual at Daout Pasha; but that being very early in the Morning, the Show was but indifferent. The Grand Seignior was dressed in the manner, as when he made his Entrance. The Valide followed about two Hours after, with great Atten∣dance.

* 2.33Mezzo Morto the Admiral, having left the Bastarda Gally behind him, sailed out of Port the 6th of April; and the Grand Seignior and Grand Vizier marched for Adrianople, where they arrived the 17th of this Month.

The 23d of this April being the Day of the Great Biram, News was brought of the Birth of a Daughter Born to the Sultan in the Seraglio, whereupon the Chimacam, to show his Respect and Duty to the Grand Seignior, caused four Days of Rejoycing to be proclaimed;* 2.34 but on the 24th Day a lit∣tle after Midnight, there happening a very great Fire, the Rejoycings were forbidden and recalled.

The Fire began without the Gate of To∣phana, the Wind at N. E. which being ve∣ry fierce and strong, soon reduced all that Quarter into Ashes, where it continued burning till Five in the Afternoon of the 25th; during which time 3000 Houses were computed to have been Burnt, and amongst them all our Merchant's Houses, excepting one who had the good Fortune to be saved: But God be praised not much of our English Goods were burnt.

About the beginning of June of this Year,* 2.35 the Marquis de Lore arrived at Constantino∣ple, in Quality of Ambassador Extraordi∣nary from the French King: He was brought as far as Tenedos by a French Man of War of 60 Guns, and from thence by a Tartan he was Transported to Constantinople, from whence, on the 12th of this Month he was carried to Adrianople, and thence with∣out loss of time he followed the Camp, which had marched thence the eighth of June.

The 23d of this Month, Tekely was Commanded by the Grand Seignior, to follow the Camp, but his Princess remain∣ed at Constantinople, both of them being in great Necessity to live, being only allowed five Dollars a Day, besides some small mat∣ter arising from the Imposts of Wine, which the Grand Seignior permitted them to bring in. The Beauty of this Lady could prevail little either for her self or Prince; for I have heard, That she was a Lady of a very hard Countenance, and her Air, and Carriage, in no wise engag∣ing.

The Turkish Army being arrived at Bel∣grade,* 2.36 they began to move on the 30th of July, and that Day to pass the Danube, when publick Prayers were begun at Con∣stantinople and Adrianople for their Succes∣ses and Blessings of their Army, which was this Year esteemed very powerful, and designed (as the common Report was) against Transylvania: But whilst the Turks marched full of hopes of Success, with a great Army supposed to consist of 100000 Men; their Boldness was much tempered by the News of the Surrender of Asac to the Muscovites after 57 Days Siege, and the Advices wanting 16 Days, it was said, That the Tartar Han arrived two Days af∣ter the Surrender, tho' had he come sooner,

he could have done nothing; for it was so closely Besieged, that the Turks themselves were of Opinion, That all the Succours sent thence, namely, from all parts of the Turkish Dominions, would not have been able to effect any thing: Neither were the Gallies, which were with five more than the 13 sent the last Month, able to ap∣proach the Place by some Leagues: Here∣upon the Corn at Constantinople, was risen 50 per Cent. and the People were so ap∣prehensive of a Famine in all the Domini∣ons of the Turks, that in case the Musco∣vites should make any Progress, they should not know which way to proceed.

At that time Mezzo Morto with the Tur∣kish Fleet was still at Scio, intending about the middle of this Month to Sail from thence; he had with him about 40 Sail of Ships besides Gallies; the Venetians were not very strong, nor did either side endea∣vour to engage.

But the most important Design of this Summers Campaign, was laid in Hungary and Transylvania, where the Sultan fixed his greatest hopes, and both Sides intend∣ed to do their best, and to bring things to a decisive Action; to perform which, His Electoral Highness of Saxony having fixed the Imperial Camp at a Place called Olasch, on the 30th of August N. S. giving out, as if the Design was to Besiege Temeswaer, and thereby to draw the Enemy into a Ne∣cessity of Sallying out, and coming to a Battle, that they might be better able to relieve the Place; to which end the Turks having passed the Danube, the nearer to ap∣proach their Enemies, made two Days March, one after the other; by which being four Leagues distant from each other.

On the 20th of this Month they held a Council of War, at which it was resolved to advance one Day nearer to observe the Countenance of the Enemy.

So that very early in the Morning on the 21st, they marched in good Order of Bat∣tel, and by nine a Clock they discovered some of the Enemies Cavalry, whom they Attacked and Repulsed several times with considerable loss to the Turks.

And on the 22d some Parties of the Christians brought several Prisoners into the Camp, amongst which was a Chiaus, who reported, That the Janisaries were very ad∣vantageously posted on the right side of a Morass, confined, and reaching to the Banks of the River Temes, and another Body of them Encamped to the Left along the Banks of the Brook Begl, their Can∣non being pointed upon that Place, where was the only Avenue, or Access where the Enemy could come upon them; and their Camp on all sides so fortified; that the Christians could not Attack them without much Difficulty and Danger; wherefore, to give the Enemy room to advance, and invite them to a Battle, the Turks on the 24th Sallied out from their Retrench∣ments, which was done only with Design to make other Lines, which were finish∣ed in two Hours time, or less; and ha∣ving there planted their Cannon, they be∣gan to play one upon the other on both sides, and as the Prisoners who had been made in several Skirmishes, assured the Christian Army their Artillery was well served, and had killed many of their Soldi∣ers, and several of their best Gunners, tho' the loss on the Christian side had been but very indifferent.

On the 25th nothing very considerable was acted: But

On the 26th the Christians advanced Guards acquainted the Generals, That the Body of the Enemies Army was in moti∣on, and marched in posture of Battle, un∣der Covert of Bushes, Shrubs, and some Trees, and that they had already posted themselves between Temeswaer and the Christian Army, the Generals of which sending to take a view of the Countenance of the Enemy; they were of Opinion, and saw evidently, that the Body which they discovered, consisted of the whole Turkish Army, and not a Detachment; upon which the Christian Army marched directly upon them to Attack and Engage them; but be∣fore they could come so near as to Engage them, they had covered and fortified them∣selves under the Bushes and Ditches, that it was difficult to come at them; and ha∣ving also a Bog behind them, and a Marsh on their left Hand, with three Ranks of Waggons fastned to each other with Chains of Iron in the Front, made the Attack al∣most impossible to be made. Howsoever the Generals resolved, whatsoever Diffi∣culties might offer, to Attack the Enemy;* 2.37 and accordingly about five a Clock in the Evening, six Battalions of Foot, sustain∣ed by two Regiments of Dragoons, Char∣ged the Enemy in the Flank under the Command of General Heusler, and com∣manded them to march into the Wood, which they performed with great Bravery, and much galled the Turks with their Fire. The Enemies Horse hereupon advanced, and finding that the Christians had formed their Line, charged them with great Fury, when 1200 of their best Horse broke through the two Saxon Battalions, not∣withstanding the latter made a very brave Resistance; but Lieutenant-General Zui∣zendorf,

with some Regiments of Horse of the same Line, beat back the Enemy, and again closed the Line with some Saxon Bat∣talions, and Attacked the Janisaries in their Intrenchments, and beat them from their Post; but the Enemies Foot being reinfor∣ced, and their Horse taking our Men in the Flank, they were obliged to retire; on∣ly two Regiments of our Dragoons, Com∣manded by the Young Prince of Vaude∣mont, advanced to sustain them, and repul∣sed the Turkish Horse; but the Janisaries returning, and Charging them again, the Dragoons suffered very much by their Fire, and many Soldiers and Officers were kil∣led and wounded; but General Heusler bringing up another Regiment to their As∣sistance, beat back the Enemy to their In∣trenchments, but was himself dangerously wounded.

Whilst this was doing, another Body of the Enemies Horse Charged another Body on the second Line, where the Christian Troops received them in such a manner, as gave a Check to their Fury, and then Ge∣neral Roses advancing with the Horse of the same Line, drove them back, and pursued them about two Hungarian Miles, when the Victory began to declare it self in fa∣vour of the Christians, and the Turks to put themselves into Flight, when Orders came to General Roses to stop the Pursuit, and to march back with the Troops; howsoever some other Squadrons of Horse followed the Enemies unto their Intrenchments; from whence the Turks made so great a Fire both with their Cannon and Small-shot, that those Squadrons were forced to retire; and being pursued by the Enemies Horse, they encountred another of the Christian Regiments, which they also put into Dis∣order; which General Roses observing, ad∣vanced with the Regiment of Caprara, and Charging the Enemy in the Flank, cut off above 1000 of them: Then the whole Christian Line advanced, and pushed the Enemy into their Trenches, where they were in such a Consternation, that the Sultan himself with much difficulty pre∣vailed upon them to keep their Ground, and defend their Intrenchments, killing se∣veral with his own Hand,* 2.38 that would have fled; and at length Night coming on, it put an end to the Battle.

Thus the Christians remaining Masters of the Field, or Place of Battle, intended to Attack again the Enemies Camp by Break of Day in the Morning; but they laboured so hard all that Night, that they fortified their Camp, and made it almost impregnable; which hindered the Germans from making another Attempt in the Morning.

The Christians lost a great many Men in this Fight, amongst which were divers Of∣ficers of Fame and Renown, as Heusler, General of the Horse, and Major-General Polland, besides others who died of their Wounds.

The Turks lost above 8000 Men, as was reported by a Pasha, who was taken Pri∣soner in the Battel.

The Troops on both sides often min∣gled, and gave no Quarter on either side. A great Booty was taken from the Turks, amongst which were many fine Horses, with several Standards.

In the heat of this Action the Germans lost some Pieces of Cannon, by reason that their Carriages were shot in pieces and the Horses which drew them were killed.

The 27th of this Month of September,* 2.39 the whole Christian Army remained that whole Day in Posture of Battle before their Camp; but the Enemy not appearing, His Electoral Highness resolved to pass the Beque, and to march towards the River Theysse, to supply the Army with Provisions, of which they began to be in want, which was done the 28th when the Turks passed the River in like manner.

And on the 29th the Christian Army En∣camped at Olasch, near the Theysse, where General Staremberg joyned the rest of the Army with six Regiments of Horse from Titul; and Orders were sent to the Bran∣denburghers, and other Troops, that were not in the Battle, having been posted in several Flying Camps, to joyn the Army, which being refreshed, were ordered to march again to observe the Enemy in their Motion.

This is the Account which the Turks themselves give of this Battle, which be∣ing finished, as here described, both Ar∣mies thought it now to be the Time and Season to withdraw out of the Field; and so the Elector withdrew out of the Field, and came to Vienna; by which it was judg∣ed, that no farther Action would happen for that Year; and in confirmation thereof, the Turkish Fleet retired into Salankement, without having done any thing of moment for this whole Year: It is not to be doubt∣ed, but that the Issue of this Battel turned to the Advantage of the Imperialists, un∣less it be that they left 26 Pieces of Can∣non in the Bushes.

The Season of the Year declining now towards the Winter, and the Elector of Saxony withdrawn from the Field to Vienna, the Sultan also following the like Example, (which displeased not the Turkish Army) returned from Belgrade to Adrianople, on

the 17th of the last Month of October, where being arrived,* 2.40 they did not much brag or boast of their Success, tho' to speak truly, they had this Year withstood a greater Force of the Christians, than they had for several Years before, which they attribute in a great measure, to the Perso∣nal Valour and Bravery of the Sultan him∣self, whose Presence ever gives Courage to his Army: And it is said, That he kept all the time of the Battle in the Rear, with 3000 Choice Men, to kill all Persons whom he should find or meet turning their Backs, upon whom he did some Execu∣tion.

In all these Actions, both in this and se∣veral other Years, the French did great Services to the Turks,* 2.41 both by their Coun∣sels, and Management of their Affairs, and especially the Marquis de Lore was very Eminent, and Signal in all his Behaviour; tho' there was never any good Understand∣ing between him and the Ambassador Mon∣sieur Chaterneau.

This Year was not very signal on either side for any considerable Exploits at Sea, or on the Watry Element: Only that the Turks destroyed three of the Emperor's Vessels, or Gallies on the Danube, and took one of very good force.

After which all things remained quiet as to the Camp in Hungary and elsewhere, except the great Preparations which were making for the re-taking of Asac from the Moscovites; from whence five Gallies were about this time returned, having left eight others with the Brigantines at Ozul.

On the first Day of November an Am∣bassador from Persia made his Entrance in∣to Constantinople, where a great Ship four Days after was Launched, carrying 100 Guns, four whereof would shoot a Shot of 24 Okes, every Oke weighing two Pounds and a half, with design to be fitted for the Service of the following Year, with three others, which were built in the Black-Sea, much of the same bigness and sized with that which was built at Constanti∣nople, and now Launched for Entertainment of the Persian Ambassador, who staid not long in that City before he proceeded to Adrianople, where he arrived about the 20th of November with a Retinue of about 150 Attendants,* 2.42 besides those which were appointed to serve him by the Turks, whose Entrance was in this manner.

The Manner of the Persian Ambas∣sador's Entrance.

About an Hours distance from the City, at a Place called Solak Chisme, the Ambas∣sador was met by the Chiaus-Basha, with about 60 of his Chiauses, as also by the Lieutenant-General of the Spahees, who with a great Retinue, conducted him to his Lodgings in the Palace of the Treasu∣rer Achmet Pasha, who had Orders to assign him 250 or 300 Dollars a Day for his En∣tertainment, for the Subsistence of him and his Retinue: Besides which allowance was given for the Food of an Elephant, and for Fodder for Camels and Horses; and also a 100 weight of Sugar a Day for Sweetmeats for the Persians, who are great lovers of that kind of Diet, with Amber and Per∣fumes.

The Ambassador having remained about 12 Days at Adrianople, and there well en∣tertained, he demanded Audience of the Grand Vizier, to whom he delivered the Credentials from the King his Master; and having been entertain'd in Discourse for about the space of three Quarters of an Hour, he departed from the Grand Vizier, having only received one single Vest, which seemed very strange, in regard it had been the Custom for other Ambassadors from Persia to receive 60, at least disposed be∣tween them and their Retinue.

Upon the 16th of December;* 2.43 the Ambas∣sador received his Audience from the Grand Seignior, on a Tuesday, which is the usual Day of the Divan, when it was formerly the Custom to give out the Pay to the Jani∣saries and Soldiers; at which time also there being an Appearance of the Chief Officers both Civil and Military, renders all things the more stately, and magnificent: But it seems at this time contrary to all former Customs, the Pay was not given out to the Janisaries and Soldiers, because per∣haps that the principal Officers of the Ar∣my were at Belgrade, and upon the Fron∣tiers of Hungary: Howsoever as great an Appearance there was of the Chiauses, as had been the Custom at the Audiences gi∣ven to other Ambassadors.

And then the Presents were sent unto the Grand Seignior, which consisted of

The Presents from Persia.

A Female Elephant covered with a Fur∣niture of Cloth of Gold, which came down to the Foot; and on the place of the Sad∣dle, there was a Chair of State erected, lined within with thin Silver Plates.

Besides which, were six Camels, each of which carried two Sapets, or Hampers used in the Wars, in which were contained the Royal Presents made up in little Bales with Coverings of Silk.

Moreover there were Ten Camels laden with Persian Hangings, six of which were of fine Silks, and four ordinary ones, but very large, and of a more than usual size: As also three Camels laden also with Cloth of Gold.

Upon the Ambassador's Arrival at the Grand Seignior's Seraglio, the Janisaries were presented as running for their Por∣ridge, and Pilao, or Rice, being about Noon, which was their Dinner time, as was their Daily Practice, as was shown to all Ambassadors.

The Place reserved for the Ambassador, was the same as was prepared for others, just over against the Grand Vizier, that the manner how that Great Minister di∣stributes Justice to the People, might more plainly appear.

The Supream Vizier sate at the same Table with the Ambassador; six of whose Gentlemen were placed at the Table with the Chimacam Chassan Pasha, and six others at the Table with the Aga, or General of the Janisaries: And in regard the Compa∣nions of the Ambassador consisted of more than 40 Noble Men, the Turks were obli∣ged to place them at three other Tables; leaving out the Pasha's of the Bench, and other Officers; so that it happened out that Day, that no Place was left for the Kadileschers, or Lords Chief Justices, all being taken up for the Persians.

At this time the Royal Presents contain∣ed in the 12 Chests which had been car∣ried upon the six Camels, were taken out, and carried by the Hands of 150 Men, as the Custom of the Turks was: The which consisted of Cloth of Gold, Damasks, Sa∣bles, Boxes of Musk and Amber, Silks, and Sattins of various Colours, Turbants, Hangings of Silk, ordinary Damasks, Bezoar-stones, Persian and Indian Sattins, Bridles of Gold, a Topus or Mace of Gold, with a Sword of the like Metal: After all which Ceremonies, according to the Ancient Custom, the Persian Ambassador being upon his Return from the Presence of the Sultan, he introduced 20 of his Persian Nobles, and then he delivered the Royal Letter. The which Ceremony be∣ing over, he proceeded out from the Roy∣al Presence Cloathed in a Rich Vest, like unto that which he had received at his Au∣dience with the Great Vizier, which was like to that which they had usually given in former times to Christian Ambassadors; besides which, the Grand Seignior present∣ed him with the same Horse which was sent him to carry him to his Audience with the Sultan, and Vested 90 Gentlemen of his Retinue. After which he returned to his Lodgings which had been provided for him and with the same Attendance as had accompanied him to his Audience.

After some Days continuance at the Ot∣toman Court, it was made known by some of the Principal Ministers of State, that one part of the Substance of the Letter was, after the Salutes and kind Wishes, and Con∣gratulations at his Ascension to the Sublime Throne of his Ancestors, The King of Per∣sia made the following Request to the Grand Seignior:

The King of Persia's Requests and Demands.

The First Article demanded.

THAT he would be pleased, if it were possible, to Remove Bebek Suliman Bei from the Government of Caramania, and to put another Prince into his place, who might prove of a more Quiet and Placid Di∣sposition than this Bebek, who was of a Tur∣bulent Spirit, and gave much Molestation to the Persians; the which the King of Persia, or Sofi, did not doubt but to obtain from that Friendship which intervenes between their great Powers and Dominions. And whereas Yearly many Persian Pilgrims travel to Mec∣ca, where having no Place to Pray in, and make their Devotions separately and apart from other Nations, they found themselves much hindered, and incommoded in the Ex∣ercise of their Mahometan Devotions; where∣fore their Desire was, That they might have a Place assigned them for the Use of the Per∣sians.

The Second Article demanded.

Farther it was desired, That the prehe∣minence of Place and Superiority in the Holy Land, might be given to the Armenian Pa∣triarch, before others of the Christian Rite, who were Subjects to the King of Persia; the which ought not to be refused them, in regard that they profess the same Faith with o∣ther Christians; namely, Greeks, and Franks.

But in regard that it hath never been the Custom of the Turks to return a spee∣dy Answer to fair Promises, or Flattering Insinuations, a term of 25 Days passed be∣fore an Answer was returned to the prece∣ding Demands; and that was done when the Ambassador received Audience with the Chimacam: And then he was Invited with all his Court and Attendance, to an Entertainment with the Grand Vizier, where they met about two a Clock in the Afternoon, the Feast held until five a Clock, and concluded without other Presents than good Musick, unless it were of a stately Horse, with an agreeable Furniture.

Some Days afterwards, he was Invited to Dinner by the Chimacam Hassan Pasha, and in a Week afterwards, he was in like manner treated by the Aga, or General of the Janisaries, who also presented the Am∣bassador with a very fine Horse.

After all which Feasts, and Bankets, and Presents, the Ambassador thought it time to send his Presents to the Grand Vizier, by his Kahya, and other Principal Officers of his Court, in number about 40.

The Persian Presents to the Turks.

There were six Camels, two of which were laden with Presents, and the other four with fine Tents and Furniture for the same, with rich Garments: The Presents were all carried by the Hands of 28 Persi∣ans; that is to say, with Cloth of Gold, Damasks, Indian Sattins, Persian Tur∣bants, with a rich Sword.

Moreover two small Bails to the Vizi∣er's Kahya, which contained about 25 Pie∣ces of Sattins, Damasks, and Cloth of Gold.

In like manner the Presents to the Chi∣macam Chavan Pasha, contained about 40 Pieces. And that which was for the Jani∣sar-Aga, was not much inferiour to it.

After some Days stay, a Messenger was sent from the Grand Seignior, with the Answer to the Letter of Business which the Persian Ambassador had brought: Which was in this manner.

The Grand Seignior's Answer, to the Persian Ambassador.

THAT Solyman Bebek being an Inhe∣ritary Prince, could not be removed from his Government; it being against the Mahometan Law to be removed from thence; nor was it possible for them to Allow, or Assign any separate Place to the Persians to Pray, and Exercise their Devotions in, because that Mecca is a Holy Place, and free, and com∣mon to all Mahometans.

The Holy Land hath also been Assigned to the Standard-Bearer Omer, as also to the Franks; the which having not been much E∣steemed, or set by in the Time of Mustapha Pasha Vizier, the Preheminence of that Place was given as a Law to the Franks, which was so solemnly given, that it could not be taken away, Corrupted, or Violated.

Five or six Days afterwards the Ambas∣sador went to the Vizier to take his Let∣ter, which being delivered to him,* 2.44 about three or four Days afterwards the Vizier sent him, by Order of the Grand Seignior, 50 Bags, or Purses of Money, by the Chiaus-Basha; ten Days after which, he departed from Adrianople, and went to Constantinople, taking 60 Days Journey within the Dominion of the Ottomans, ac∣counting Tocat in Mesopotamia, and other Parts; the which was so divided, that a Persian Merchant coming to die within that Dominion, his Goods may be challenged by his Relations, and conveyed away to their Inheritance.

The Persian Ambassador had still another Request to make, in respect to his Na∣tion.

That the Persian Subjects who Inhabit at Balata in Constantinople; wanting a Place for their Devotions, may have that Place re∣stored to them for their Prayers, which was formerly belonging to the Armenians.

The which Request was granted to them before the Departure of the Ambassador,

with Power to rebuild the same again in what should be wanting; the which was taken away soon after the Departure of the Persian Ambassador from Constantinople. And tho' the Armenian Commissary endea∣voured to proceed, and made his Com∣plaints at Adrianople, against the Impedi∣ments he had found; yet no Remedy was found, but an end was put to all the Work, and the Workmen desisted from all other Proceedings in that Building.

And here it may be enquired, How it came to pass that so many Embassies were sent from Persia to the Turks successively, one after the other? The Cause of which is evident from the Succession of the Three Sultans one after the other; namely, So∣lyman, Achmet, and Mustapha, who now Reigns; to every one of which, as it is the constant Custom for the Persians to send an Ambassador; so on the other side, on the same Occasion, it is for the Turks to send unto the Persians.

* 2.45Towards the end of this Month, the Elector of Saxony returned to Vienna, which was an evident Demonstration, that there would be no farther Action in Hungary for this Year; and at the same time the Tur∣kish Fleet retired to a Bay near Salanke∣ment, without having done any great Da∣mage.

The Persians, as we have said, being departed, and on their way homewards; the Sultan considered in what manner he might most conveniently and readily pay his Army both of Horse and Foot; for which important Service Money did not readily offer; wherefore to supply that Want, the Grand Seignior sent for the Tef∣terdar, or Treasurer, to come to his Pre∣sence, but he not being able to appear with ready Money in Hand, the Tefterdar could scarce make a shift to save his Head; tho' with great labour and difficulty he sa∣tisfied the Spahee's, charging them to re∣turn timely at the beginning of the next Year, to follow him to the Wars: And in the mean time Commissaries were sent from all Parts to collect and gather all the Taxes which had been laid on the People in all parts, whether in Europe or Asia, within the Ottoman Empire, as likewise what Re∣venue was arising to the Grand Seignior from Offices, Customs, Taxes, &c. which are usually sold every Month, especially in the Month of March over all the Empire, which commonly brings in several Milli∣ons: So that the Tefterdar, or Treasurer, was forced to employ Spies to advise him where the Money was, and in whose Cof∣fers, which yielded great Sums for supply of the Grand Seignior's Occasions.

These things being over, great Prepa∣rations were making for the following Campaign, both by Sea and Land; seve∣ral half Gallies were already built for the Black-Sea, Commanded by Dervish Ogli Bei of Smyrna. The Fleet under the Com∣mand of Mezzo Morto, who was Captain-Pasha, consisted of 25 Sail of Men of War, all of them being the Grand Seigni∣or's own Ships, and such as being joyned with those of Barbary, would be too strong a Match for the Venetians.

This whole Winter the Grand Seignior passed at Adrianople, where after the Ex∣ample of his Father, he delighted much in Hunting. Howsoever as the Year came on, he neglected not the thoughts of War, nor the Preparations for the ensuing Year; but as yet the Scheme for the War was not designed nor laid.

Anno 1697.

THE Embroils in Asia with the begin∣ning of this Year seemed to be a little quieted, gave hopes to the Turks, [ 1697] that Basora would shortly be restored to them.

'Twas thought at this time, that the Marquis de Lore making little or no show at Adrianople, being then in Quality of Envoy Extraordinary, would follow the Camp for the ensuing Campaign; but as to the Ambassador Castelneuf, he resolved to remain at Adrianople, acting for the Af∣fairs of their King and Nation, between whom and the Marquis appeared no good understanding.

The Friendship still continued, and seemed to increase between the French and the Turks, till the latter began to be some∣thing doubtful of them, upon the Reports and Rumours which flew about, That the French were busied in making a General Peace with all the Allies; tho' they at first confidently denied it to the Turks, who notwithstanding grew Jealous of them; and from that time their Mutual Friendship began much to abate.

The Tumults in Asia still continued; to quiet which, and to carry on the War in Hungary, the Turks prepared to enter into Transylvania, to which end they daily Listed and Enrolled New Spahee's and Ja∣nisaries in all the Provinces of Asia, issuing forth very rigorous Orders, That the Mi∣litia in all those Parts should this Year ap∣pear early in the Field; and greater Prepa∣rations were making for this Year, than for a long time before, by reason that the

Sultan out of his Glory and Pride, resol∣ved to make his utmost Effort this Year on Hungary, and Transylvania, and according∣ly to win all back again, and if not to put an end to the War, to come to an Honour∣able Accommodation of Peace, which the Turks were sensible could not be avoided, in case they should receive any Blow, or suddain Foyl the next Year from the Chri∣stians.

This the Ambassadors of England and Holland so plainly foresaw, that they lay upon the watch to observe all the Inclinati∣ons and Motions of the Turks; and both sides now esteeming themselves upon the Crisis, laboured all that was possible to bring things to their desired Issue; when daily Spahees and Commissaries were em∣ployed to gather and collect Sums of Mo∣ney in all the Asiatick Provinces, were ob∣served to pass the Bosphorus, and other Seas, for Service of the War; of which the Tar∣tars being informed, wrote to the Sultan to send them Money to supply their Occa∣sions against the Moscovites, of whom they were more affraid than of the Polanders. Howsoever the Turks being Headed by so Brave a Sultan as this present Grand Seig∣nior, as they thought, did not seem to fear any thing, but to carry all before them, which so elevated them to such a heighth of Pride and Insolence, that the Mediators were of an Opinion, That until a conside∣rable Blow were given to the Turks,* 2.46 it would be impossible to reduce them to any Terms of Reason and Moderation.

In which Humour they made Preparati∣ons for the following Year both by Sea and Land: That for the Sea designed for the Euxine, was chiefly provided at a Port called Sinap, in the Country of Trabesonda, where they also were casting many great and heavy Cannon: And into the Arsenal of Constantinople, were in this Month of January 120 Cannon more brought in and lodged there.

But what other Sultans have not done, this hath had the Ambition to perform; that is, under his own Name all the Pieces of Gold and Silver should pass, within his Empire; the like of which was never known in any other Country, unless in England under the Reign of King Wil∣liam III, and the Great. I cannot say that all the Gold and Silver within the Turkish Dominions was brought into the Mint to be new Coined, but it is certainly reported, that a great part thereof was; to which the five Sol Pieces made by the French, Ita∣lians,* 2.47 and other Nations, greatly helped and contributed, of which there had been many Millions Imported in 15 Years, from 65 to 80, which were very beneficial to the Coynage of those Countries.

It was also farther commanded, That all those who had any Venetian Zechins, should bring them to the Mint, there to be new stamped with the Letters of this Sultan's Name, and there to be changed with the old ones of Venice, or otherwise changed for Silver, at the rate of two Dollars and a half per Zechin: Likewise all the Li••n Dollars, commonly imported by the Dutch with the Figure of a Lion thereupon, were order'd to be brought into the Exchequer, where the Figure of the Lion being beaten out with the Hammer, the Turkish Impres∣sion with the Name of the Sultan, was to be fixed in the place thereof: To bear the Charges of this new Coyning, a quarter of a Dram of Silver was taken from every Lion-Dollar, and then it was put into the Fire, where it was Hammered again, and some Cbristian Letters on the side thereof were permitted to remain, that thereby it might appear, that the same were reformed Dollars, and such as came from the Chri∣stians; and that for the Alterations thereof, the Turkish Workmen were not to be bla∣med; for which Work the Turks, Grecians, Armenians, and Jewish Workmen, had so much allowed them by the Day, according to their Agreement.

About this time, being the Month of Fe∣bruary, Advices were brought frequently to the Sultan then at Adrianople, from the Tartars, That the Moscovites were fully resolved this Year to fall down by Sea up∣on Caffa; which being believed, and so expected, very strict and severe Orders were given by the Turks, to provide and equip 80 Frigats, with 15 Gallies, and many other Transport-Ships, to carry the Militia into the Black-Sea, to hinder the Descent, or Landing of the Moscovites; which Report gave great Fears and Ap∣prehensions to the Turks, who thereupon took different Resolutions and Measures in their Affairs.

Besides the Preparations for the Black-Sea, there were others made for the Euxine, or White-Sea, where Mezzo Morto was ap∣pointed Captain-Pasha, or General against the Venetians, being accounted a Man of great Courage, and Conduct, at which time there was building a Ship of an im∣mense bigness,* 2.48 which had been already many Months upon the Stocks, being built by French and Greek Masters, the like of which, that is so large, had never been built in that Arsenal; for it could carry more than 600 Soldiers, besides Seamen, and Levents; the which being put into some tolerable condition of readiness to

Sail, the Sultan to show his Greatness at Sea, as well as at Land, to the Persian Ambassador, (who remained behind, after the great Embassy) issued out his Com∣mands to three Pasha's, whom he had made Generals, to equip and fit themselves brave∣ly.

The first was Mezzo Morto, who was to Engage the Venetian Fleet at Sea, and to return Victorious; and in case they did, he assured them, that they should gain his singular Grace and Favour; and as an evi∣dence thereof, he bestowed upon each of them a very rich Coftan, or Vest, richly lined with Sables.

The Second was also a Pasha Vice-Ad∣miral, designed against the Moscovites.

The third was also a Pasha, in Quality of a Rear-Admiral, who was to mount the Danube, and engage against the Imperial Fleet, wheresoever they should encounter them, either about Belgrade, or Buda, or any other Parts of the Danube.

After the Sultan had passed this Cere∣mony, he gave leave to his Generals to depart, and speaking very kindly and gra∣ciously to them, he encouraged them to put themselves in order for their Respe∣ctive Voyages: So that now it was very apparent, that tho' the Turks would be much weaker this Year by Land, than they were the last, yet they would be far stron∣ger by Sea, having Mezzo Morto for their Admiral, and every thing in their feveral Fleets disposed for Maritime and Naval Engagements; the Success of which, we may shortly hear in the course of those Months which are proper for Actions of the Sea.

But before we proceed so far, it may be pertinent to our Business to recount how the French Ambassador at the Turkish Court lost a Law-Suit which he had with a certain Jew at Gran Cairo, to his great Mortifica∣tion; for supposing that he was able to a∣vail in all Points, where his Master's Inte∣rest was concerned; he was highly trou∣bled to find himself disappointed in a Busi∣ness at Gran Cairo, relating to so inconsi∣derable a Person as a Jew. The Matter was in this manner.

We must know, that the Jews in Egypt have commonly very great Power, by rea∣son that every Pasha of Gran Cairo, who is the greatest Beglerbey in all the Empire, when he enters upon that Office, he com∣monly takes with him from Constantinople, some Subtle Jew,* 2.49 who is a Man of great Riches, to manage the vast Revenue of that Province; which sets him up so high, that he is above the reach of all the Gran∣dees of the Empire, and is Honoured and Reverenced as the Dominus Fac totum, or as Joseph in the Land of Egypt.

The French Nation had at that time a Consul in Cairo, who thought himself a Match for the Jew; who on the other side esteemed himself higher than all the Chri∣stians, or Beyes, or Agaw's of Egypt; and consequently comported himself with Neglect and Disesteem towards the French Consul, which he not being able to support, made his Complaints to the French Ambas∣sador at Adrianople, against the Insolence of a Jew, of which the Consul gave a most Passionate Report to Monsieur de Chateau∣neuf, then Ambassador for the French King at the Port; where he so managed the Bu∣siness, that a Chiaus was sent for to fetch the Jew from Cairo, to the Divan at Adri∣anople; who accordingly taking this long Journey, appeared in Judgment before the Grand Vizier.

This Jew had the Report amongst all People, of being a Person very Judicious, Prudent, and of a patient Temper; and since it was the Office of the Ambassador to appear against this Jew in Judgment be∣fore the Grand Vizier, the Jew behaved himself with so much Modesty, and Pru∣dence, that he gave unto all the Standers by, some deep Impressions of his Under∣standing and Innocence, and that he had been injured by the French Consul at Cairo, of whose Honesty and Wisdom, the World in those Parts, had not conceived any high Opinion, nor yet of the French Nation: But that depending too much on their great Friendship with the Turks, they presumed to insult over a People, which had not for some Ages been accustomed to hard Usages from Christian Nations. Notwithstanding all which, and that the Grand Vizier had patiently understood the Pleadings on both sides, and was as well possessed with the Cabals of the French Nation, yet he gave Orders to the Chi∣aus-Bashee to take the Jew into Arrest; the which was said to have been done out of Policy by the Vizier, to cool, and mo∣derate the Anger of the Ambassador, who plainly declared, That unless his Master, the King, had satisfaction in this particular, he was commanded to retire back into France, and to bring with him all the French Mer∣chants, and all others of that Nation, into their own Country.

It not being now a time for the Turks to Quarrel with the French, or to create more Enemies than they have already, they took these Menaces with an unaccu∣stomed Patience, tho' the Great Officers being offended hereat, vented an abun∣dance of Reproaches against the French

Nation; only the Grand Vizier using his accustomed Patience, said, That Justice could never do Injury to any, for that their Law, and the Alchoran, commanded it so to be done.

And in this manner this Difference pas∣sed over, with some Advantage to the French, who had obliged so great a Person as the Jew, who is the Negotiator of all the Affairs of Egypt, to leave his Employ∣ment to attend the Summons of the French Ambassador at such a distance as it is from Gran Cairo to Adrianople: Howsoever after all this, the French Nation did not seem to be fully satisfied, because that the Vizier after all shewed some Respect to the Jew, bestowing upon him a Coftan, or Vest of Favour and Honour, declaring himself in favour of the Jew, that he had been falsely accused, and injuriously drawn away from the Grand Seignior's Service. To repair which Affront and Neglect to the King of France, a Demand was made by the Am∣bassador, That License might be given to Repair and Rebuild the Cathedral Church in Galata, which had for above 500 Years remained in the Christian Hands, and last∣ly had been Repaired and Rebuilt at the Charges of the Most Serene Republick of Venice, soon after the last War which they had with the Turks in Candia; but now the French depending on the great Services they had done the Turks, seized on the Church, which had been the Cathedral of that Diocese, and affixed the Arms of France upon the Gates thereof; at which the Venetians being greatly offended, who were the Patrons thereof, and had many Years past purchased the Advowson from the Turks, made their Complaints to the Grand Vizier of the Injustice which had been done them: Upon which, the Vizier resolving to end the Controversie between the Christians, seized the Church of Saint Francis or Francisco, in Galata, and Con∣verted it into a Turkish Mosch; and in such like manner commonly end all the Con∣troversies which Christians have between themselves, that are referred to, or to be termined by, the Turks.

The Ceremony which the Turks used in turning the Christian Church into a Mosch, was by a Command from the Sul∣tan to the Chimacam, to enter the Church with 200 Men of his Followers, together with a good Number of their Imaums, who began at their first Entry into the Church to sing with a loud Voice, the Tune and Song called Sele, which is a Hymn extracted out of the Alcoran, to the Praise and Glory of God; the which cau∣sed great Sadness in the Hearts and Eyes of many good Christians in Galata; which had not been done, as many Turks confess, had not the French pretended a Right to that Church; with which they in a short time were forced to swallow two very bitter Pills, to the Dishonour of France, and Prejudice to the Christian Cause.

Towards the end of the Month of March,* 2.50 the Sultan equipped out seven great Men of War of 50 and 60 Pieces of Cannon each, and all armed with 500 Levents, or so many Sea-Soldiers a piece; besides which there were 14 light Gallies, with 25 Fri∣gats, and all accompanied with divers Sai∣ches laden with Provisions, every one of which will carry as much as 200 Carts, which are laden with Biskets, Meal, and all sorts of other Ammunition.

Whilst these things were in Action, the French Ambassador, Monsieur de Chateaneuf, offered this Summer to make his Campaign with the Grand Seignior in Hungary against the Emperor, with which the Turks were well enough pleased, in regard they esteem∣ed this Ambassador to be a Man of great Wisdom and Experience.

Tekely likewise about this time was pre∣paring himself to accompany the Vizier to the War in Hungary, the which some were of an Opinion, That it would be of good consequence to the Sultan; upon which account the Vizier conceived a great esteem for him; and was desirous to see the good Effects of all those Promises, which Tekely's Princess had made to him.

This Lady of Tekely went unto, and re∣turned from Adrianople, and was observed to be of an Humour very Assiduous, Dili∣gent, and Malitious against the Imperial∣lists, but very kind and obliging towards the French, but most especially to Mon∣sieur de Laurent, who the last Year was with the Sultan in the Campaign of Hun∣gary, and was often invited by Tekely's Lady, and by Count Tekely himself, to take a Dinner, or a Supper, or some other Repast with them, at which Monsieur de Laurent was often welcomed, and highly Treated.

A Friend of mine once acquainted me, That having a Curiosity to see the Wife, or Princess of Tekely, he had the Fortune to hear Mass with her at the Capuchin's Church at Galata, where well observing her Physiognomy, it appeared very Ill-favour'd, Old, and Ugly: She professes to be a Roman Catholick, of which she boasts to many People, and that her Hus∣band hath divers Correspondents almost in every Regiment belonging to the Imperial Army, from whom he hath all the Cor∣respondencies imaginable with the Princi∣pal

Commanders both of Horse and Foot, by means of which nothing passes, but what he hath a good and perfect Account of, from all parts of the Imperial Ar∣my.

The Army which was formed and drawn up against the Moscovites, consisted for the most part of Spahee's from Anatolia, and of a sort of a Militia of Pascialagio, belonging to Silistra, of which they reck∣oned about 35000 Men, besides Tar∣tars.

The Reputation of this present Sultan was so great, that in all Parts both of Asia, Africa, and Europe, he was esteemed the most Fortunate of all the Sultans; for that in the space of two Years only appearing in the Wars, he had showed so much Cou∣rage and good Conduct, that he had al∣ways beaten the Germans; that is to say, when he went himself in Person to the Wars; for which cause he was highly E∣steemed, Honoured, and Obeyed.

But as to the Rebels in Asia, they drew themselves up very formidably in the Field, expecting to encounter the Army of the Port, and to give them Battel.

The great Power and Nerve of the Otto∣man Force is at present in Asia, that of the Turk-men, who are a sort of People well mounted on very strong and Warlike Hor∣ses, Brave, and Valiant, and well Exerci∣sed in the Lance, and Bow; so that there was great expectation when some Feats of Arms would begin: And on the other side of Anatolia, they began to Transport over their Militia, being designed early this Year against the Moscovites, after which the Actions in Hungary were to begin.

But before that something may be dis∣coursed in relation to the present State of the Greek Church,* 2.51 the Patriarch of which was very Froward and Passionate, ready to act any thing which came into his Head, without consideration of the Prejudice which might result thereby: And accord∣ingly having a Quarrel with the Metropo∣lite, or Bishop of Salonica, he deprived him of his Title and Office, on occasion of some Disobedience to certain Com∣mands, to which the Patriarch would oblige him; but the Bishop not being able to sup∣port the same, out of a Madness, and Fu∣ry, and transport of Rage, he made a Voy∣age from Salonica to the Grand Vizier, to whom he offered 15 Purses, on condition, That in Despight of the Patriarch he might be re-established again in his Diocese of Sa∣lonica, or Thessalonica: And to incline the Vizier the better hereunto, he demonstra∣ted that hereby the Grand Seignior in this time of War might gain great Advantages; For that in case the Vizier would accept of these 15 Purses, it might be an Example to other Metropolites, to offer some 20, some 15, and others 10, according to the Value, and Riches of the Diocese; the which Proposition much pleased the Sul∣tan, having a good pretence thereby to charge all the Metropolites, or Bishops; the which being many in the Greek Church, brought a considerable Sum to the Grand Seignior.

The Greek Patriarch hearing hereof, made his Journey to Adrianople, there to make his Complaints against this hard Usage of∣fered to the Greek Church and Nation; the which irritated very much the Anger of the Moscovites against the Turks: And tho' the Moscovites did greatly at this time threaten Caffa, and give Terrour and Affrightment so far as to Constantinople it self, yet the Sultan did not neglect the Thoughts and Contrivances of carrying forward his War in Hungary, with as little Expence as was possible, all Charges being retrenched;* 2.52 a∣mongst which one particular, was that of Tekely, to whom no more than five Dollars were allowed a Day, that was for the Maintenance of his Lady, Servants, Hor∣ses, and other Parts of his Epuipage; on∣ly to help them they gave a Liberty, or License to sell Wine, which was at that time prohibited: And here it was that he set up his Wine-Sellar within the Greek Li∣berties, near to the Privileges of the Pa∣triarchate, where he continued to exercise the Trade of selling Wine with very good Benefit and Advantage; without which, the five Dollars per Day could not have yielded to him and Family half his Subsi∣stence.

And being now entered into the Month of April,* 2.53 four of the Men of War belong∣ing to Barbary, arrived before the Arsenal of Galata, where other Men of War re∣mained also at an Anchor, and frequently fired their Cannon, with a Chi viva at every Shot, or to the Fortune of the For∣tunate Sultan.

On this occasion, the Barbarouses brought their usual Presents, as accustomary to the Sultan, and designed to remain in the Port until the Departure of the Fleet prepared against the Venetians, consisting of 23 Men of Mar, should be in a readiness to Sail: And thus the Sultan being resolved to car∣ry on the War both by Sea and Land, did neither rest Day nor Night, but busied himself in the proving of his Cannon, and making his Warlike Preparations with dili∣gence, was so pleasing to the People, that never was any Sultan so acceptable to the Soldiery, as was this Mustapha, and the

more highly was he esteemed, in regard he was a great Lover of Justice, which is the Prime Ornament of Emperors, and of the highest Monarchs: But notwithstand∣ing all the Care of this Grand Seignior, and the Preparations he made for the War of the following Year, yet his Force nei∣ther by Sea nor Land, did amount unto the Strength of that of the preceding Year; by reason the Rebels in Asia becom∣ing more powerful, a Proclamation was is∣sued forth, That none should Transport them∣selves out of Asia into Europe, on Penalty of having their Houses demolished, and their Pos∣sessions of Timar and Ziamet to be all Ruined and Destroyed, with all the Lands they held of the Sultan. With which Menaces the Re∣bels, who were Soldiers, were so incensed, that such as they took for Prisoners, they did not Kill, but what was worse, they cut off their Noses and Ears, and in that Con∣dition they sent them to the Port, that therewith they might make a report of their Strength and Power.

Farther, there was a Report, That these Rebels (as formerly it had been done) de∣manded the Life of the Valide Soltana, which is the Queen Mother, and whereof there have been two Examples in former Times, and of one Mulchi Kadun, a great Favourite, whom they cut in Pieces, by reason that they would not endure the Go∣vernment nor Counsel of Women; suf∣fering howsoever the Queen Mother to live, because she did not make Intrigues in the Affairs of State: Of which the Asian Soldiers being put in mind, and also the Europeans of their Tumults, let us expect to see the Issue of these Tragedies.

The Tumults in Asia gave great Disqui∣ets to the Affairs of the Turks in Europe, and retarded all things, or put them back∣ward, and all in expectation of Succours from the Levant, but none coming, the Sultan resolved howsoever to begin his March, and to that end appointed the Days thereof, the several Camps, and the Days of their Movements, it being deter∣mined to remain nine Days under the City of Philippopolis, and on the 4th of July to pass Sophia, and to make seven Days March thereof, where having fixed their Tents for some Days, then to proceed for Nissa, and there also to halt for some Days; all which was done with such slowness, as might give time to the Asian Troops to o∣vertake the main Body of the Army; the which not appearing, the Sultan received divers Letters from the Pasha of Bosnia, beg∣ging with great Instances that he might have Relief and Succours sent to him, whereby to raise the Siege of Bihatz, which the Imperialists had closely begirt on all sides: Whereupon the Sultan dispatch∣ed away those few Pasha's which he had with him, and all the Forces near Belgrade, and also all the Arnauts, and all for the Succours and Relief of Bihatz.

The Turks found themselves much more Weak than they had been the Year before, and no appearance of Recruits from Asia, nor any hopes of quieting the Troubles in those Countries, whereupon the Grand Seignior, finding himself greatly Distressed, he very urgently sent his Imperial Com∣mands from his Camp before Philippopolis, to those Pasha's who were appointed to at∣tend and watch the Motion of those Re∣bels, commanding them, that (laying aside all Excuses, they should in the ••i••vell's Name, leave those Rebels to their own Imaginations, and send him five of those Pa∣sha's with 300 Horse a piece, in the lieu of those which he formerly dispatched for those Parts; namely, the Pasha of Da∣mascus, call'd Mustapha Pasha, who had been the late Vizier; the Pasha of Aleppo, Osman; the Pasha of Sebaste, Usuf Pasha; the Pasha of Diarbekir, Mustapha Pasha; and the Pasha of Adana, call'd Fusli Pasha; but when these might be expected from so long a Journey, was very uncertain; so that the Turks themselves were very doubt∣ful of the Event and Successes of this Year; for that all the Power which the Turks could make up, could not amount un∣to above 40000 Men, with Horse and Foot.

Things remaining in this posture, it was the Opinion of most People, That the Sul∣tan would not go this Year to the War, but only in appearance, and that he would only be upon the Defensive, avoiding all Fights and Encounters in the Field. And as to the Moscovites, the Reports were va∣rious, and full of uncertainty.

All this time the Sultan remained at So∣phia, chearful, and much pleased to un∣derstand that the Polanders had declared the Prince of Conti for their King, which could not but produce a Peace with that Kingdom, and an Union with that Crown; which tho' not true, yet it gave the Turks hopes of an Addition of 30000 Coruzzi unto their Forces against the Germans; who as they did assault Tokay the last Year with good Success, so they were full of hopes to do the like for this also, with the Posses∣sion of several other Castles and Fortres∣ses: But then it was thought necessary that Tekely should be sent to them with Title of King of Hungary; which when the Sultan understood, with the good Ty∣dings, That Bihatz did bravely defend it

self, with Assurances of conserving the same against all Enemies, it was esteemed News of such Importance, that the Grand Seignior gave Commands to the Grand Vi∣zier, to Write the News into all Parts, and particularly unto Tekely, That the Grand Seignior had declared him King of Hunga∣ry, for which the Sultan had sent him a Commission, with a Letter, the Super∣scription of which was, Orla Maggiar Croli, which signifies in the Hungarian Language, To the King of Hungary: To which were added also some Purses of Money for de∣fraying the Charges of his Journey, and adorning his Equipage.

* 2.54This Command came very unfortunate∣ly at this time for Tekely, who was then grievously afflicted with the Gout, and pre∣paring, for Recovery of his Health, to pass over to the Baths, and Medicinal Waters of Prusia, or Bruscia, which fall from that Mountain, which was anciently called, Mount Olympus: But what was worse, the Chiauses came furiously upon him at Pru∣sia, and without Compassion, Comple∣ment, or good Manners, threw him into a Carr like a Log to make him a King, without any Respect, which was most mi∣serable for him; for he had not only the Gout, but had a Paralytical Distemper up∣on him, so as that he was seized with a Palsie in his Head, Neck and Arms: And in this manner he was carried Day and Night in a Waggon, until he came unto the sight of the Sultan.

All this time the Sultan remained at So∣phia, whilst the Army, or greatest part thereof, marched towards Belgrade, and some into Bosnia; and having received some Advices out of Asia, That the Rebels of that Country, were inclinable to a Sub∣mission, and made some Evidences as if they intended to return to their Duty and Obedience: The Sultan became very much pleased, and put himself that time into an excellent Humour, and thereupon was induced to dispatch several Aga's into Ana∣tolia, with Letters written under his own Hand, in an Humble and Caressing Style, not usual for any Sultan before that time to Write, Swearing,

In the first place, To grant Pardon to all, and a general Amnesty to such, as should re∣turn to their Duty of Obedience.

Secondly he swore, That he would do Ju∣stice to all in their Just Demands and Pre∣tensions.

Thirdly, That he would give every Man satisfaction.

Fourthly, That he would damnifie no Man either in his Goods, or Estate, or Life; but on the contrary reward every Man according to his Deserts, provided that they became O∣bedient, and Deserted the Party of the Male-contented Beys, or Pasha's, against whom are so many Examples of God's Vengeance and Ju∣stice: Of which he advised them well to con∣sider before they entered into a March, which would conduct them to his Terrible and Af∣frighting Presence; which if they did not accept and do, he Swore, That he would make up a Peace with the Christians, and March in Person into Anatolia, there to take Vengeance upon them for their Offences, and extirpate the whole Race of those who have taken up Arms against the Mussulman Cause; for which, by the Laws of the Alcoran, they are to Die, and without Mercy to suffer Death.

This News being carried to the hearing of the Male-contents, about 10000 of them Deserted the Cause, and proceeded to pass over from Anatolia into Europe, and without any delay took the nearest way to reach and overtake the Army of the Sultan; to hasten which, the Grand Seig∣nior wrote Commands to the Chimacam, and Bostangibashi, to prepare Quarters for them in the Imperial Gardens and Houses as they passed, and that they should in all their Marches, want nothing of Refreshments, nor those who are un∣provided want Arms, or any other thing necessary for the War; amongst which there were 3000 Bostangees fitted out for the War, from the Grand Seignior's Sera∣glio's: And such Rigorous Courses were spread over all the Countries of the Lesser Asia,* 2.55 that those Laws and Commands of the Sultan being put into execution, it was believed impossible for any Embroils, or Seditions, for ever after to arise in the Les∣ser Asia, tho' they could not but be some times apprehensive of Troubles from Per∣sia; for since the time that this King was Crowned, he was always esteemed a Troublesome and a Dangerous Enemy to the Turks; for tho' he was not wanting in his Courtships, and Embassies to the Otto∣man Court, as we have seen, yet he was still encouraging the Georgians, and the Persians in the Parts of Basora, to be trou∣blesome to the Turks.

The Sultan still remained at Sophia, where having Advices from the Frontiers, he dispatched away a Capugibashee to his Mother the Valide Soltana, giving her to understand, That his Forces had fallen up∣on a Body of Germans, which he had rout∣ed;

and taken the strong Fortress of Titul, in which he had put all the Garrison to the Sword; and did not doubt, but speedily to enter into Transylvania; from whence he promised to send his Mother a Present of some fine Young Ladies to attend, and wait upon her, and to be conducted by some of those Black Eunuchs, which were attending at that time upon his Per∣son.

After such Vapours and Boastings as these, which the Sultan expressed to his Mother, it was not judged to be longer Honourable for the Grand Seignior to re∣main at Sophia, a place so far distant from the Ottoman Camp in Hungary; whereup∣on marching with the Main Body of his Army, slowly, and in good Order, Mes∣sengers were sent unto Sarchan Pasha, then at Belgrade, who was then the General, and esteemed an excellent Soldier, and a Couragious Man, and well acquainted with the Countries about those Confines, to hasten his March to meet the German Army: And so also the Sultan followed, and arrived in good time to joyn the Main Body of the Front about Titul. In the Re∣lation of which Battel, there were two Accounts sent from Constantinople; one of the 29th of October, and another of the 5th of November.

* 2.56Such as were on this side of the Tibis∣cus, and saw the Battel, report, That the Rout consisted only of such, as with great difficulty passed the Tibiscus by their Swim∣ing, and they report, That the Turks could never imagine, that it was possible for the Imperialists so soon to Attack them, as that Day they did; much less that it was possible for the Grand Vizier to pass his Cannon, Ammunition, Provisions, with all the Militia of Janisaries over that Bridge, and thence to proceed to Segedin, and so into Transylvania, and into the Upper Hun∣gary.

In the mean time the Imperialists kept on their March to meet the Turks, and ha∣ving prepared their Trenches, they fortifi∣ed themselves therein, which caused the Grand Vizier to assemble all his Pasha's, which were to the Number of 15, leaving the Sultan on the other side of the Water, with a Body of Spahee's, and Silishars, which are a sort of Spahees belonging to the Court, together with the Solakbassees, who are a sort of Pages also belonging to the Court; but the Taraklee Spahees, who are Timars and Zaims, followed the Pasha of their own Province and Country; of which making an Account of their Num∣bers, they calculated them to amount unto 25000, all Expert Men, who managed their Arms to a Miracle, but were in this Battle either Killed, or Drow ed.

The Arnauts observing the German Ar∣my to be marching to Attack them, were the first who endeavoured to pass the Bridge, and to put themselves to Flight:

The Janisaries also had the like Intenti∣ons to do the same, saying, That they had been Abandoned and Deserted by the Spahees: And as they approached near to the Bridge, the Grand Vizier observing a Disposition in the Arnauts to pass the Bridge, and fly, he assembled a Body of his own Aga's to∣gether, intending therewith to hinder and prevent the Flight, which was done by killing a great Number of them.

The Arnauts finding themselves so ill Treated, they put themselves into a Muti∣ny, or rather into a Rebellion against the Grand Vizier, and killed him: After which some Thousands of the Spahee's placing themselves on the other side of the Bridge, with their Swords drawn in their Hands, they defended the Bridge, and suffered none to pass over it.

By this time the Imperialists having put themselves into good Order of Battel, fu∣riously Attacked the Turks on all sides: At the first Charge the Turks made some Resistance, but at the second they began to give way; and observing the great De∣struction, and Slaughter, that the Fire and Sword made, being terrified therewith, they resolved to cast and precipitate them∣selves into the River, where the greatest part of them perished; all which, as was said, happened in the space of two or three Hours; where could never be greater Confusion, nor greater Effusion of Blood of their own Soldiery, of which the Chief Commanders were Slain without Mercy, or any Quarter, and such a Multitude of Turks, and Chief Pasha's are said to have perished upon the Spot, that during the whole War, the like Slaughter never hap∣pened as this: For according to the Re∣port of those, who were not far from the Presence of the Sultan, during all the time of the Battle, they agree, That according to an Account and List of the Slain, there never happened so Great, and so Terrible a Destruction as this to the Ottoman Army, which more unhappily fell upon the Prin∣cipal Commanders, than upon the Com∣mon Soldiers, which they esteem to be a just Judgment of God upon them; for that no less than 15 Pasha's were killed in this Engagement; five of which had been Beglerbeys, or Viziers of the Bench, be∣sides the Supream Vizier.

And such a Slaughter, or Destruction as this, was never known to have happened,

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

for never in the Memory of Man, or any Age, was it ever known, that five Vizi∣ers had ever fallen in one Battle; amongst which was the Supream Vizier, Giafer Pasha, another Pasha, the Aga of the Ja∣nisaries, a Pasha and Vizier; Missir Oglü a Vizier, Fasli Pasha a Vizier, and the rest of them were all Pasha's of Provinces and Governments.

There were 74 Captains, with their Of∣ficers and Soldiers of their several Cham∣bers, all slain: In every Chamber they account 100 Janisaries, of which there may be in some Chambers, 10 or 20 Su∣pernumeraries; so that it may be the ge∣neral Opinion, That above 8000 Janisa∣ries were slain, and those of the bravest and best Soldiers of all the Turkish Mili∣tia, of which the Sultan was so sensible, that he declared, He was not so much trou∣bled for the Number, as for the Quality of such Brave and Experienced Soldiers, who had so often, and in so many Engagements Worsted and Overthrown the Germans.

Besides these, were killed in this Bat∣tle, the Kahya-Bey, or Lieutenant Gene∣ral of the Janisaries, with his 600 Braves, which are always attending upon his Per∣son, having so many in that Company, or Regiment, being the first Oda, or Cham∣ber of the Janisaries; for indeed the Ka∣hya-Bey is always more Esteemed, Obey∣ed, and Feared, than the Janisar-Aga him∣self.

Amongst the four other Generals of the Militia of the Janisaries, the Zargagi-ba∣shee, who was the Major-General of the Janisaries, was slain; of the other three were ordained one against the Muscovites, and the other two against the Venetians by Sea and by Land: And besides the 74 Captains, as many Beiracters, or Ensigns, were also slain.

And besides these 2500 Segmens of Bos∣nia, being divided into several Divisions of the Great Vizier, and divers other Pasha's, with all the Gebegees, who are Armour∣ers, together with their Captains, and Ge∣neral; as also the Gunners and Topegi∣bashees, or Masters of the Ordnance, which are divided into two several Orders of Militia.

The gaining of this Battle was of that high Concernment, and the Consequences thereof so considerable, that from thence the Peace following was derived; so that we may believe all the World to be inte∣rested therein, and to be the Subject of the Speculation of the greatest Monarchs of this World.

And Instance whereof we have in the following Letter, Written by the Emperor himself, and with his own Hand, in La∣tin, to King William of England, in this Style.

The Emperor of Germany's Letter, to King William of England.

PAUCAS ante horas desiderato ex Hungariâ nuntio recreamur, quod exercitus noster sub ductu Principis Eu∣genii de Sabaudia die decimo currentis Mensis, Ottomanica Castra ad Tibiscum triplici aggere munita, & triginta fere ho∣stium Millibus propugnata, non solum fortiter aggressus sit, verum etiam Divi∣no juvante numine foelicitèr superavit, caesis in loco decem & amplius millibus quos inter Supremus Visirius, & Janisa∣riorum-Aga numerantur, reliquique quos Pontis Angustia capere non potuit in Flu∣men praecipitati & maximam in partem submersi, Tormentis etiam 72, una cum aliquot mille curribus, & commeatu in potestatem redactis, nostra vero ex par∣te tantum 500 occisis, & totidem sau∣ciatis.

Englished thus.

IT is within some few Hours, that the Post is arrived from Hungary, bringing News, That our Army under the Command and Con∣duct of Eugenius Prince of Savoy; did not only on the 10th of this instant Month, Vali∣antly Attack the Ottoman Camp fortified up∣on the Banks of Tibiscus, or Theysse, with a treble Ditch, and with a Force of Thirty Thousand Men therein, but assisted by the Gracious Favour of Almighty God, most hap∣pily subdued them, killing Ten Thousand of them upon the Place; amongst which, were the Supream Vizier, and Aga of the Janisa∣ries, and the rest, which the narrowness of the Bridge could not contain, threw and pre∣cipitated themselves into the River, where the greatest part of them were Drowned; with Seventy two Pieces of their Cannon, with some Thousands of Waggons laden with Pro∣visions, which all fell into our Hands; and all which was done on our sides with the loss only of 500 Men, and about as many Woun∣ded.

After this Battle was ended, all was in great Confusion amongst the Turks, and e∣very one shifted as well as he could to e∣scape.

The Grand Seignior himself posted to Temeswaer, from whence he dispatched a Black Eunuch to his Mother, with the un∣happy News of the late ill Success, and the Particulars of it, to avoid false Reports, which upon this Occasion might be apt to be spread abroad of the Death of himself; and other Sinister Rumours more fatal to the Empire than ever was known afore times, and might terrifie the Valide Solta∣na; who by the News of the Life of her Son, might take Heart, and receive Com∣fort, and prevent the Mutinies amongst the Soldiery and People, who were too ready upon such an Evil Report, to En∣throne the Brother of Sultan Achmet, the last Brother of the three lately Deceased: But it being known that Sultan Mustapha was certainly Alive, all was pacified; which being of so great Importance, the Grand Seignior sent a Letter, as I said, to his Mother, by a Black Eunuch, by way of Nicopolis, who was a Magriplee, or an Abyssine, or Ethiopian, well beloved by the Queen, and greatly Confided in by her. The Relation on the side of the Turks, was represented as favourably as the thing would bear; in which he declared, That there had been a very great Battle near a River, in which his Person was not pre∣sent, and so was safe; but his Vizier be∣ing Engaged against an Army of 100000 Men, was Slain, together with the great∣est Number of Janisaries, and Foot Soldi∣ers, and those of the Principal Officers; the which Relation he also dispatched by the second Master of the Horse, with a Coftan to Hussaein Pasha, declaring him to be Grand Vizier, which happened well for the Christians; for he was a Man al∣ways inclined to a Peace, and no great Friend to the French;* 4.1 he was a great Lo∣ver of Wine, which mollified the Rigorous Temper of a Turk, and made him more Jo∣cund and Easie than commonly the Water-Drinkers amongst the Turks profess to be; at which News the Christians immediately conceived an abundance of Joy, not doubt∣ing but that a Peace would immediately ensue, as it did accordingly; for all Peo∣ple were grown weary of so long a War, which had now continued for about twen∣ty Years, with very Unfortunate Successes to the Turks both by Sea and Land.

After all which the Grand Seignior re∣turned with what speed he could to his Se∣raglio at Adrianople, where all things had put on a Countenance of Melancholy and Sadness.

In the mean time the Christians resolving to prosecute and follow their Blow, whilst the Turks with Fear and Disorder were fly∣ing homeward, the Prince Eugenius of Savoy, spent the whole Day on the 12th of October in passing the Imperial Army over the Save;* 4.2 but the River being nar∣row, and the Weather good and favoura∣ble, they arrived early in the Camp on the other side:

And next Morning of the 13th, they began their March towards Bosnia, which was difficult to pass, by reason of the Mountains, Woods, and Rocks in the way, which was rude, and unbeaten.

Upon the 14th of this Month, the Bo∣dy of the Army Encamped about Kottor, where the March had been worse, and more difficult, and longer by an Hour than the Day before; and tho' Colonel Kyba with his Squadron was marched before, howso∣ever he proceeded not in his March, be∣cause he had News on the way, and chief∣ly from Bagnaluca, That the Enemy had not the least Intelligence of the Advance of the Imperial Army, so that he made a Halt until His Most Serene Highness was come up to joyn the Body under his Command, that so they might hold a Conference, and Council of War together, which they per∣formed standing not to lose time; and then Colonel Kyba proceeded with his Forces unto Castle Doboy, where was a Garrison of Turks, and was situated two or three Hours from the Christian Camp: And here it was thought fit not to go farther this Night, because they concluded, that they were not as yet discovered by the E∣nemy, because they had not heard them shoot the Alarm, as their Custom was to do whensoever they discovered any Body of Men approaching towards them; and so to keep all things still without any dis∣covery, they marched with much silence, without Beat of Drum, or Sound of Trum∣pet: And the very same Day the Prince of Savoy arrived in the Camp; where a Coun∣cil of War being called, it was concluded, That Colonel Kyba should be dispatched away before, to take Possession of some Ground near to the Turkish Castle of Doboy, as was formerly agreed, and there to form his Camp, where he was reinforced with 600 Men: Upon appearance of which, his Orders were, That in case the Castle did not presently Surrender, he should march immediately forward, and without loss of time march into the Country, leaving the last 600 Men before the Castle to inclose the Enemy, who should soon be reinforced by 200 Men more: And so should pro∣ceed to the second Castle, called Maglay;

where finding Opposition, he should leave that likewise,* 4.3 and so proceed forward.

By this time, or towards the Morning of the 15th of this Month, some Shooting was heard, which was the first Signal of an Alarm: Howsoever they continued to March without beating their Drums, or sounding their Trumpets; but this Days March was more troublesome and difficult than the Day before, by reason that it was through Hilly and rough Places: Howso∣ever coming at length to Castle Doboy, they Summoned the Place to Surrender, the which being denied at first, by the Turks in Garrison, the Christians laboured all Night, and in that time raised a Battery, on which they planted six Pieces of Cannon, with two Mortar-pieces.

* 4.4The Day following the Cannon begin∣ning to play, the Turks Capitulated, and Surrendered themselves at Discretion and Mercy of the Enemy.

The Garrison consisted of about 80 Men, out of which they made Prisoners of such as appeared to be the most Soldier-like Men; as for others, who were Old, and Infirm, with Women, and Children, they gave them liberty to shift for themselves, and go to what Places they pleased.

In the Castle little Provision was found, and few Arms, so that Colonel Kyba, ac∣cording to his Instructions from the Gene∣ral, proceeded in his March: And

On the 17th came to the Castle Maglay, which upon the first Summons Surrender∣ed, on condition only to go out with their Wives and Children, leaving all other things behind them.

On the 18th by Break of Day in the Morning, the Garrison of Maglay marched out, and Surrendered the Place: About which time nothing more was heard from the Enemy, only that the Kahya, the Son of the Deceased Pasha, was Encamped near Orossa Viza, and that the Imperial Fora∣gers were annoyed much by the Meroders of the Enemy.

On the 18th they appeared before the Palanca or Pass called Schebze, wherein were 300 Turks: which upon the Sum∣mons demanded a time of Consideration until the next Day, which the General of the Imperialists would not grant them; but advanced with 400 Foot Soldiers, and 300 Dragoons, with the Artillery belong∣ing to them, and mounting 12 Pieces of Cannon against the Palanca, in the Night they stormed it in two Places; in which Attack having lost 12 or 15 Men within the Pallisadoes, without any stop, they still advanced forward, whilst Colonel Kyba meeting with 200 Horse of the Ene∣my, whose Design was to cast them∣selves into the Pass Schebze, but were pre∣vented, being in part killed, and in part taken Prisoners: And having Intelligence, That the Kahya was with a Body of about two or 3000 Men, between Schelze and Branduck, he caused Batteries to be raised to hinder their ready Passages.

On the 19th they marched on through the Orohovizar Valley, being a very trou∣blesome Passage at the first Entrance thereinto, not only for the Narrowness and Streightness of the Road, but also be∣cause the Enemies on both sides had cut and ruined the Ways; so that about three a Clock in the Afternoon, the last Regi∣ments, which were Horse, entered the Field, and joyned the former Troops, but the Infantry came not thither until it was Night; and as to the Artillery and Bag∣gage, they remained full half an Hours March behind, at a distance from the nar∣row Passage, where it remained all the Night guarded by two Regiments of Dra∣goons, which in the Morning marched in safe Conduct, and guarded them in safety to the Body of the Army.

The 20th the March was through Nar∣row and Rocky Passages, worser than the former, or that way which leads to the Castle Branduck, which was so difficult, that the Imperial Army would have been in a very ill Condition, had the Turks been capable of disputing vigorously the Passage with them: But at length having passed the most rough and difficult Ways of Branduck, which were so inconvenient, that the Artillery and Baggage could not be brought after them, but were forced to be lodged under a strong Guard on the Orohovizar Valley, where the Places were fairer and more pleasant, but the Inhabi∣tants were fled and gone, but had left be∣hind them all sorts of good Fruits, with small and large Cattle in great Numbers, with sufficient Herbage and Sustenance to maintain them.

The 21st the Imperial Army arrived near the River Bosna, over which there was a Bridge, but so Old and Ruinous, that the Army was not willing to adventure a Pas∣sage over it, but rather esteemed it more secure for every Dragoon, or Horseman to take a Man behind him, and therewith to Wade through the River; with this Burden and Equipage they marched over a very high Hill for the space of two Hours, which nevertheless was more easie to pass over than the former: So they continued their March again over the Bosna, by the help and convenience of a good strong Bridge, not ruined by the Enemy, and so

advanced into the Camp, near the Village Doboy, where Colonel Kyba joyned again with Prince Eugenius, advancing still be∣fore the same Night towards Sarai, or Se∣raglio, to observe the Place, to which great Numbers of People of that Country were fled for security: But because that City was not capable to receive such Mul∣titudes of People, great Numbers of them were forced to lodge before the City Gates, so as the Prisoners declared, which toge∣ther with those in the City, would make up a Body of 30000 Men, but they want∣ed Arms very much:* 4.5 So that tho' the Ka∣hya was then personally present in the Ci∣ty; yet his Power and Authority was weak to dispose Matters into any tolera∣ble State and Condition of Defence.

But the Imperialists found this Part very Fair, Fruitful, and well Built; and there∣fore the Christians and Inhabitants of that Land went to the Imperial Camp to ren∣der themselves up under their Prote∣ction.

At the beginning of this March, on the 22d, the Troops found the Ways Narrow, Crooked, and Deep, but afterwards pas∣sed into a more pleasant Place, called Vi∣sega, and then repassed again the River Bosna, over a Bridge; at the end of which, after an Hours time they Encamped; and by this time Colonel Kyba was come back with his People, who had done some Exe∣cution against the Inhabitants in their March, killing some, and making Prisoners of others, which put the City of Seraglio into great Amazement and Confusion, whilst several Parties of the Enemy roved round the adjacent Parts, and took several Prisoners; at which time a Cornet, with a Trumpeter, were sent into Seraglio, to Summon the City to submit willingly, or otherwise no Quarter should be given to a∣ny of them.

The 23d two Parties sent out the Day before, returned back again very early in the Morning, before the breaking up of the Imperial Army, bringing no News, or Advice from the Enemy: Only the Cornet gave a Relation, That as he was going to Se∣raglio, for almost a Quarter of an Hours time he had met with no Body at all; but after∣wards falling in amongst the Turks, to whom having made a Sign with his Hand, he show∣ed them the Writing he had with him, which were Proposals for the Surrender of the City; but that he happened to see the Trumpeter killed before his own Eyes, and with much difficulty, with divers Wounds escaped him∣self: And farther reported, That all the In∣habitants in great haste went out of Sera∣glio.

After this the Army in a Body march∣ed to the City, which the Turks had quit∣ted, and abandoned, leaving none remain∣ing but Christians and Jews, from whom they took all they could find, but nothing of great Value, in regard the Turks had not only disposed of the best of their own Goods, but likewise before their Flight had Plundered the Houses of the Christi∣ans, and committed the Guard of the Ca∣stle to a Garrison of 150 Men; and the same Day towards Evening a Fire broke out in the City, of which no care being taken to Extinguish it, it was totally burnt and consumed. The Castle howsoever was not burnt, for it being built of Stone, re∣quired leisure to demolish, which at that time could not be allowed.

Howsoever several Parties on the 24th returned from abroad, bringing some Pri∣soners with them, and many poor Christi∣ans came likewise Voluntarily in, with Re∣solution to pass the Save, upon the Return of the Imperial Army; which happened to be on the 25th and 26th, but Colonel Kyba staid, (as he usually did) some time be∣hind to burn and destroy every thing that remained, as yet unconsumed.

And on the 27th they marched on, un∣til they came to the Camp, which was be∣fore Seniza.

And on the 28th they entered into bad Defiles, and at length into the Valley of Orohovitz, where the Artillery and Wag∣gons joyned again with the Army.

The 29th they Encamped near Schebze; where Advices were brought to the Gene∣rals in what manner the Enemy was ga∣thered into a Body near Belgrade, consi∣sting of several Thousands of Men.

Lastly, The Imperialists returned again over the Save, carrying with them a great quantity of Turkish Cloth, with many Tur∣kish Women, and Goods belonging to the saved Christians, with a great quantity of small and great Cattle.

After the Return of the Christian Army under the Command of Prince Eugenius of Savoy, from the Fortunate Successes in Bos∣nia, the Troops were commanded on the 30th of October, to march from Marga, to∣wards Caranzebes; from whence, on the very same Evening, Lieutenant-Colonel Count of Herberstein, was Commanded to March before, with his National Mi∣litia of Rascians, joyned with some Ger∣mans.

And the 31st was appointed for a Day of Repose, and Rest for the whole Army; and on that Occasion sufficient Provisions were made both for Horse and Man.

When on the first of November the Body of the Army began to move from Caran∣zebes, and in grievous Weather, with Rain and Snow, marched all the way so far as Soczan: And then about two a Clock in the Afternoon they made a Halt near Gialuk, in the Valley of Carassona.

And on the third they pitched near the deserted Village of Petrovizas.

From whence on the 4th Days March, a Detachment was sent before to Invest the Fort of Vypalancha, where the Lieutenant-Colonel of the Regiment of Rabutin, Lord of Graser, with a Body of 500 Horse, had taken his Post, or Possession, and seated himself on the side of the Danube about 100 Paces from the River, advancing to the Pallisadoes, and there immediately be∣gan to fire upon the Place, and to Entrench with so much diligence, that in a short time they had opened the Trenches 200 Paces; and having prepared the small Pieces of Cannon, which they brought with them, and one Mortar-piece, they began therewith to make their Batte∣ries.

The 5th Day in the Morning, they set in order their Batteries, and began also to throw Bombs into the Palanca, which they found to be much more strong than it was believed at first; for that it was en∣compassed with a double Ditch, and treble Rows of Pallisadoes, and a place of Re∣treat guarded with 400 Men, and well provided of all things; and for the better Security, they had made some hundreds of Faggots; and in the mean time the Turks in a great Body showed themselves upon another Stream of the Danube above, and others at the Foot of the Mountain, near to Rham, together with Saicks, and Frigats on the River. Likewise on the o∣ther side of Belgrade, near Kroska, Seman∣dria, Columbas, Isbeck, and Gradiska, which were all places so near, that in 24 Hours time, Succours might be brought from them, at least to hinder, if not totally pre∣vent the Designs of the Enemy: For which reason, the General, Count Rabutin, resolved to lose no time, but forthwith to make an Assault upon the Place, and if possible, to take it by force, to which end he prepared 500 Germans, and 200 Ra∣scians to make the Attack upon the Place.

On the 6th with dawning of the Day, appeared on the other side of the River, a great number of the Turkish Boats, bat∣tering with their Cannon, as they had done all the Day before against the Christi∣an Camp: And in the mean time, with the Break of Day, the Attack began in two Places at the same time; that is, upon the left Hand of the Danube, where the great∣est difficulty was, under the Command of Heer Viart, Sergeant-Major of the Hano∣ver Troops; and then on the right Hand, on the River Cerasse, where the Soldiers to pass the Water, Waded up to the Middle, under the Command of Captain Beaumont, of the Regiment of Rabutin: And to give the greater Inconvenience to the Enemy, they fired their Cannons continually with∣out Intermission, as also their Bombs, besides Small-shot from 250 Men out of the Trenches; but in regard that in the Night before certain Recruits were sent to reinforce the Place, together with a Boat, on Board of which were 100 Men from Columbas, and Isbeck, with new Ammuni∣tion, so that they met with very much re∣sistance; besides, they Storm'd without making any Breach, and that in the sight of 20 or 30 Saicks and Frigats, which ap∣peared above and below the Place; inso∣much as things looked more doubtful and hazardous, than with any promising Coun∣tenance of Success. Howsoever General de Rabutin and Sergeant-General Count de Leiningen applyed all possible care and In∣dustry to hinder and prevent the Enemies Succours from coming upon them, by which the Soldiers at the appearance, and so near an approach of their Enemies, again reassumed new Courage; and tho' they were at first well enough animated, when they observed the Turks come upon them, with their Cries of Allah, Allah, which they usually make upon their Charge, and that 400 of their Horse remained for a Re∣serve, the Vigour and Spirit was renewed on all sides, and then with Axes and Hat∣chets they cutting down the Pallisadoes, gained so much Ground, that all things laid open before them: So that after a doubt∣ful Conflict of about an Hour and a half, the Place was overcome, and taken by the Valour of the Christians; so that not only the Commander in Chief Hay Beigh, but all the Garrison, with the Inhabitants, without any Exception, were Killed, or droven into the Danube. All which was done and acted in a very short time, which was well that it so happened; for had it admitted of any farther delay, the Christi∣ans would have encountred many more Difficulties, for that the Turks were bring∣ing over many Succours, which would have caused very dangerous Diversions. When on the contrary, the Turks lost 800 Persons, and the Christians only 10, which was almost a Miracle to consider.

General Rabutin was always present on the right Hand, during the Assault, and after it, the better to Encourage the Soldi∣ers, he alighted from his Horse, and ha∣ving Commended and Praised every one publickly in his Place according to his Deserts, and especially the Sergeant-Ge∣neral Count of Leiningen, who had the left Wing under his Conduct, and had done and acted as much as could be expected on such an Occasion; and indeed both he and Sergeant-Major de Viart, showed as much Bravery, Conduct, and Military Experience as could be desired of the greatest Cap∣tains in the World.

But now in regard this Pass of Vypalan∣cha was too far within the Territory of the Enemy, to be any long time maintained; for that should the Garrison be German, or Rascian, it would be too much exposed, without any possibility of Relief, the Ge∣neral Rabutin resolved to Slight and Demo∣lish the Place, and accordingly he gave all up to the Flames.

And on the seventh Day, so soon as the Cannon were carried away, it was put in∣to execution, which was soon effected by the great Numbers of Country-men and Peasants employed upon that Work; and the same Morning the Camp was removed nearer to the Palancha.

The Particulars of Men Killed and Woun∣ded in the Assault of Vypalanca.

• ...
  GERMANS.
  • Killed,
    • Men 10
    • Horses 26
  • Wounded,
    • Men 87
    • Horses 21
• ...
  Of the ARTILLERY.
  • Killed, 0
  • Wounded, 1
• ...
  RASCIANS.
  • Killed, 4
  • Wounded, 18
• ...
  Found in the Place.
  • 16 Ensigns exposed round the Town.
  • 63 Turkish Prisoners, and 32 Women.
  • 11 Pieces of Cannon of Copper, carrying from two to eight Pound Ball.
  • 200 Granadoes for the Hand, some Powder, and some few other Warlike Arms.
  • About 200 Bushels of Grain, with some Flour of Wheat.
  • Besides which, all other things were given up to the Plunder of the Soldiers.
  • Besides which, there were above 1000 Pieces of Rock-Salt, which were brought from Valachia.

These Successes which the Christians had gained over the Turks in all Places, through the whole Course of this Year 1697, put them into a kind of Despair of being any more Victorious, but rather to yield to the Hand of God, and to fix a Pe∣riod to the Limits of their Empire, which they believed, by the Providence of God, was no farther to be extended.

These Thoughts put all the Great Men, and Governors of the Ottoman Empire into such a Melancholy, that contrary to their usual Humour of Pride, and Vain Imagi∣nations of Riches, and Enlargement of Empire, as if the Ottoman Arms were ne∣ver to be weakened, or brought low; all the Powerful and Warlike Men, together with the Sultan, concluded, That after such a Series of Misfortunes; both by Sea and Land, God frowned on their Enterpri∣ses, and would no longer favour their Mar∣tial Proceedings: And therefore, that until

such time as God's Anger against them was appeased, there was no safety but in a Happy Peace, to be Negotiated by the only true Allies of the Ottoman Empire; namely, the Great King William of Great Britain, and the Most Potent Lords, the States General of the Low-Countries, or United Provinces; for whom at that time, namely, for the first the Lord Paget was then Ambassador at the Port; and for the latter was the Heer Colyer, both of them Persons qualified by their Offices, and long Experiences in the Turkish Affairs, to be∣come Mediators and Ministers for their Powerful and Puissant Masters, in Treating a Peace of the greatest Importance of any that hath happened in this, or in the pre∣ceeding Age; unless it be the General Peace, in which all Christendom was so near∣ly concerned.

What farther moved the Turks to desire and promote this Peace, was their Ill Suc∣cesses at Bassora, where that Pasha, whom we have formerly mentioned, had carried for some time all before him; and tho' the Persians had often promised their Assistance to the Turks, for Suppression of that Re∣bellion, yet nothing was acted by them in reality, until the Grand Seignior, and the whole Government became sensible, that nothing was to be expected of good either by War, or Peace, but by their own Negotiations; in pursuance of which the Mediation so often offered, was at length accepted, and put into execution at the beginning of the Year 1698.

Anno 1698.

[ 1698] THIS Year was happily begun with a Resolution on all sides to make the Peace:* 4.6 Howsoever at the beginning there∣of things looked very frowningly, with∣out that gentle Prospect, which is com∣monly the Fore-runner of a Peace: For at the beginning of this Month, three Aga's were dispatched from Adrianople, to the Chimacam of Constantinople, with Orders to facilitate their Passage into Asia, by the most Expedite Posts that could be formed; howsoever in their Passage they entered into Conferences with the Chief Ministers at Constantinople, giving them to under∣stand, That they had Orders to Summon the Tartar Han, to appear in Conference at Adrianople, with the Sultan, Mufti, and Grand Vizier, whose Opinions and Reso∣lutions were at first to continue the War; which they declared themselves very a∣ble to do; for tho' it was true, that they had lost the best part and the most flourish∣ing of their Janisaries, and Infantry, yet their Cavalry was almost entire, and able to Engage the Enemy with an Advantage; and were able to form a better Army this, than the last Year.

The Tartar Han declared, That he did not fear the Muscovites so much as he did the Cossacks, and the Poles, but of them they are in no great Apprehensions nei∣ther; for that the French Ambassador had promised and assured them, That the Prince of Conti should so disturb the Affairs of Poland, that no danger needed to be feared from that People.

And now to strengthen these Proposals, the Sultan decreed, That new Contributi∣ons should be required over all Asia, and Men of great Authority were sent with Bands and Troops of Segmen, and other Militia, to raise the Money by force and power.

Orders were also sent to the Chimacam of Constantinople, to put the Forges of Con∣stantinople at work for founding great quan∣tities of Cannon.

And that the Maritime Affairs might not be neglected, Mezzo Morto was conti∣nued in the Office of Captain-Pasha, or Admiral, with Orders, and Instructions to sight the Venetians.

Thus all things looked as if nothing had been intended besides a War. How∣soever the Great God of Hosts, in whose Hands remains the Balance of Peace and War, having designed otherwise, and at length to give repose, and rest after so long Wars, to the Nations of the Earth, was pleased in his Divine Providence to di∣rect a Conference in the Month of May, between the Great Vizier, the Tartar Han, and the Mufti, at Adrianople, who having considered of the many Difficulties under which the Mahometan Religion, and the Ottoman Empire laboured, gave it as their Opinions to the Sultan, that there could be no safety to either, but in a Peace, for which they produced many Reasons, but none of greater force than that for this Year, no Assistance could be expected from Asia; nor was it possible to recruit in one Years time, the lost Body of the Janisa∣ries, which is the Nerve of the Ottoman Militia; in which Opinion the Chimacam of Adrianople, called Mustapha Pasha, who had formerly been Grand Vizier, concur∣red with the others, and all of them joyn∣ing together in the same Opinion, made their Applications to the Sultan, giving him to understand, That having duly con∣sidered of this important matter, nothing seemed so necessary as a Peace, which God

had now pleased in his Goodness, for the Comfort and Relief of the Mahometan Cause, to offer unto them: The which Declaration and Counsel of these Great Men made to the Sultan, took so much a∣mongst the People, that the Report slew like Lightning, and in five Days time was divulged almost over all the Empire.

All the Persons that were present at this private Conference, were the Mufti, Han of Tartary, Aga of the Janisaries, Aga of the Spahees, and Grand Vizier, and the Sul∣tan himself.

To make some little appearance of un∣willingness to make a Peace, as if they had been able to continue the War, they sent away towards Belgrade, some Field∣pieces of Brass, which had been lately Cast, or Founded; and on that Occasion 15 Chambers of Janisaries, with their Ci∣urbagees, or Captains, of which every Chamber consisted of 100 Men, but were computed in all to make up 2200 Janisa∣ries, 200 Zebegees, or Armourers, 70 Gunners, which were commanded by a certain Person, called Ali Pasha, who was Brother in Law to the late Grand Vizier: It was reported, That all the Chambers had their full and compleat Numbers, but upon the true Computation, they were found to be much short, and not above 70 in a Chamber; by this kind of Computa∣tion, the poor Estate of the other Militias of the Ottoman Army being to be judged, made the Proposition of a Peace to become much more acceptable to all Sorts and Con∣ditions of Men: One Evidence of which, was the readiness and haste the Grand Seignior and Vizier showed to be upon their March towards Sophia.

In order to which, it was appointed, That the Aga of the Janisaries, should on the 6th of June begin their March,* 4.7 and that the Sultan should follow two Days af∣terwards being the 8th; for that already towards the latter end of May, all the Ca∣mels, and Horses, which were provided to carry the Tents and Baggage, were arrived at Adrianople.

In pursuance whereof the Grand Seig∣nior, and Grand Vizier, began their March on the 8th of June, when it was supposed, That taking Sophia in their way, and making that Place a Quarter of some Days Repose, there to Celebrate the Feast of their little Biram, they might arrive at Belgrade by the 15th of July; when all the Army of the Turks could not amount to more than 40000 Men, tho' they should receive an Addition of 10000 Men from Asia, which was the greatest Number of Soldiers that they could expect this Year from those Parts, and hereof many Hun∣dreds failed of making up that Number. Howsoever in regard that the Peace in Hun∣gary, and other Parts with the Christians, was almost secure and certain, it rais'd a Chearfulness amongst the Turks, so that they little regarded any Apprehensions of a War against the Persians, or their Con∣junction with Bebek Sulyman, a Bold, In∣solent, Daring Person, who lived on the Confines of Persia, whom the Turks desi∣red might be suppressed by the Persians: But the Persian Ambassador, notwithstand∣ing the great Treatments and Civilities he had received from the Turks, made some Difficulties thereof, saying, That it could not be foreseen, or measured, how far such a War as this might go; this Bebek Sulyman being a most Pestilent Fellow, feared as well as beloved, by all the Arabian Princes; so that a War with him might cause much Blood.

Howsoever the Turks pressed most ear∣nestly to have this Sulyman suppressed, al∣ledging, Both the Honour and Safety of the Persians was concerned: And to En∣courage them herein, the Grand Vizier promised them the Sultan's Assistance; for that having now made a Peace with the Emperor, and the other Christians, (as might be presumed to be) his Hands were at liberty to carry the War into what Parts of the World that he should think fit; which he should not more readily do to any Region, than against those who might be troublesome on the Frontiers of Persia, and bring Disturbance to the Ottoman Port.

Such Friendly Discourses as these passing between the Grand Vizier, and the Persian Ambassador, a Promise was farther made unto him, That the Sultan would not deny any thing to the King of Persia, which might be of satisfaction to him; being resolved to cultivate a most sincere, and lasting Friend∣ship with him, according to the Capitulations lately made and agreed between those two Great and Mighty Monarchs.

After which they did Eat, and Feasted together, with high Expressions of Love, and a lasting Friendship; in farther Confir∣mation of which, a Present was made to the Ambassador of another Horse, well Equipped with a Rich and Noble Furni∣ture, and then the Tefter Emini, who was designed to be Ambassador from the Sul∣tan to the King of Persia, and was prepa∣ring for his Journey, was introduced into their Presence, that an Acquaintance might be begun between them; the which was easily effected, considering that the Tefter Emini was a Person of a good Address, and

Skilful, and Practised in the Persian Lan∣guage; he was a Refined Person, and fit, and proper for such an Embassy as this to the Persian Court, whom the Grand Vizier had Chosen, and Elected for this Employ∣ment; for which he was preparing himself with fine Horses of Price, well Equipped with rich Embroidered Saddles, with Arms inlaid with Jewels, and other Gallantries, which might serve for Presents at his Arri∣val at the Court of Ispahan, to the Persian King, such as Quivers, Bows, and Ar∣rows.

Besides all which kind Treatment, the Grand Seignior himself Treated him at his Tents without the City of Adrianople; as also did the Chimacam of Constantinople at his Palace on the Bosphorus, or Black-Sea.

Thus we may see how freely and frank∣ly the Turks Treated the Persians at this time; for now having secured the Peace with the Western Princes in Hungary, who were much more formidable at all times than the Eastern Nations: Howsoever, that no Advantages might be taken nei∣ther on that side, strict Commands and wise Instructions were sent to the Beilerbey of Gran Cairo, a Person of great Courage, Wisdom, and Experience, one of the Sul∣tan's Bed-Chamber, to take the Care and Charge of those Eastern Kingdoms, gi∣ving him also the Title of Seraskier, or General, and Beylerbey of Bagdat, or Baby∣lon, with Orders forthwith to form an Army with the People of the Country, and therewith to Attack Bassora, and drive out from thence the Rebellious Pasha, and set∣tle in his Place another Pasha Commissio∣nated by the Port to succeed in his Em∣ployment, with a Hattesheriff from the Sultan: But principally above all things it was recommended to him, to hinder and prevent all Incursions of Rebel Sulyman upon the Persians, who being good Friends to the Sultan, he could not permit, or suf∣fer, that they should receive any Affront, or Injury, from such as go under the De∣nomination of Subjects to the Port.

But these Eastern Countries so far di∣stant as Persia, were not now the care of the Turks, whose Thoughts were wholly taken up in what manner they might finish the War with the Christians, which were divers; as with the Emperor, the Veneti∣ans, the Old and Irreconcileable Enemies to the Port; also with the Polanders, and Moscovites, the latter of which were not much known to the World, either for Friends, or Foes, tho' they began now un∣der the present Czar by the taking of Asac, and some other Actions, to make them∣selves known to the Turks, and other Na∣tions of the World.

It being now resolved on all sides to make the Peace, the Mediators who were to manage the Treaty, were nominated and appointed, and the most proper Per∣sons esteemed to be the Ambassadors from England, and Holland, both of which ha∣ving never been Engaged in the War on any of the sides, but had always been true and ancient Friends to the Port, the Turks could have no Objections to alledge against either, nor had the Christian Princes any cause to suspect the Faith and Friendship of two such Ambassadors, whose Offices and Persons were acceptable to the Turks, and not displeasing to the Christians.

The Names of these Ambassadors design∣ed to this so Necessary and Most Honour∣able Employment, were the Lord Paget, Ambassador for William King of Great-Britain; and the Heer Colyer, Ambassador for the Lords the States of the United Pro∣vinces.

All Matters being now ripe for Action, and a willing mind for Execution, the Turks moved with their Camp on the 11th of June 1698. commanded by the Grand Vi∣zier, (the Grand Seignior still remaining behind in his Tent) and with them also moved the two Ambassadors with their Equipages: And to put every thing into a good posture, and a way of Dispatch, the Lord Ambassador's Secretary was dispatch∣ed away a second time, as he had been the first on the 10th of May for Vienna, from whence he returned on the 5th of July to Sophia; where on the same Day he there met with the Lord Ambassador Pa∣get, to whom he Communicated the good News of the Happy Inclinations of the Emperor and that Court towards the Peace: But that no delay should be made therein, the same Secretary was again dispatched a∣way, to hasten the Emperor's Ambassa∣dors to the Place appointed, and agreed up∣on for the Treaty, and to procure, and bring with him Passes, and safe Conducts for the Turkish Plenipotentiaries, who were the Reis Effendi, Chief Chancellor, or Se∣cretary; and Maurocordato, who was the principal and first Interpreter to the Grand Seignior.

These two Persons, together with the Lord Paget, and the Dutch Ambassador, set out from Sophia before the Camp, on the 15th of July, and on the 24th they had pas∣sed 10 Hours beyond Nissa, and on the 31st they arrived happily at Belgrade.

The Ambassadors remained at this place for the space of two Months; that is, of August and September, the which passed

soon away, in regard that the Expectati∣ons of Peace had so filled Mens Hearts, that nothing was heard in all Places but the Voices of Peace and Joy in all their Quarters.

At length the Mouth of October being entered, the Proclamation of Neutrality was first published at Peter Waradin, to the great Pleasure and Satisfaction of all Peo∣ple, both Christians and Turks, and after∣wards at Belgrade.

On the 9/19th of October, the Lord Paget, and the Dutch Ambassador left their Camp near the City, raised on an Eminence, where was a good Air, and a good Pro∣spect over the Countries round about; and upon the same Day early in the Morn∣ing they passed the Save, a River which runs from Bosnia, and falls into the Danube at Belgrade, where it loses its Name.

In passing this River this Order was observed.

First went an Allai-Bey, or the Marshal of the Show, with about 50 Horse.

Then 60 Chiauses on Horseback.

A Guard of Janisaries, being about 330 Men, all on Foot.

An Aga belonging to the Ambassadors, with his own Servants, and six Domestick Janisaries.

After which followed two Flags, one with the English Coat of Arms, and the other was a large Red Cross in a White Field.

Then followed the English Ambassador's 6 led Horses covered with very rich Furniture, followed by the Gentleman of the Horse to my Lord Ambassador, attended by a Gio∣vane di Lingua, or a young Druggerman, or Interpreter.

Then came up the two Interpreters at∣tending His Excellency the Lord Ambassa∣dor, on each side of his Horse, and they attended with two Heydukes in their own Country Habit; and on both sides 10 Chiohadars, or Servants, who carry the Cloaks, or Vests of the Great Men, in White Vests, with their Carbines on their Shoulders.

The Brother to the Lord Ambassador road afterwards with six Chiohadars.

Then followed the Secretary, and Do∣ctor, with two English Gentlemen; one from Aleppo, and the other from Tri∣poli.

Also six Pages with the Lord Ambassa∣dor's Coach, with a Turkish one, which went before the Common Servants, who marched all on Horseback, two and two.

At their Passage over the Bridge of the Save, which was lined with Janisaries, three Guns were fired from the Castle; and the Gallies, Saicks, and the Frigats as they passed fired ea••h a Gun.

About half the way to Semblin, the Chi∣aus, and others, whom the Vizier had sent along with them, made a Halt, and having wished a good Journey to those whom they conducted, returned back.

About an Hour after these Matters had passed, the Dutch Ambassador followed, and was used with the same Civility as those preceding.

The Emperor's Ambassadors, because they sent Passports to the Turkish Ambas∣sadors Signed by the Emperor's Hand, de∣sired to have others Signed by the Sultan: But because it was considered that this ex∣change of Passports would take up a great deal of time, the Mediators found out, and agreed upon this Expedient, That the Pro∣clamation being made in both the Emperors Names, no Passports should be delivered, either from the Germans to the Turks, or from the Turks to the Germans; but that a Pleni-power should be given to the Midia∣tors to grant Passports to People, who were going up and down within the Limits of Neutrality agreed on both sides: So the German Ambassadors resolved to go to Car∣lowitz within three Days time, tho' their Wooden Houses were not arrived as yet.

The Mediators also agreed upon the same, and to place themselves so, that their Doors might be over against each other at a good distance, whereby the Turks re∣mained wholly on the Belgrade side, and the Germans towards Peter Waradin.

The 11/21st the Venetian Ambassador arri∣ved at Futack, but the Muscovite Ambassa∣dor, after their unthinking manner, came directly the same Day to Peter Waradin, without giving the Governour Notice of his coming; by which Neglect of the Moscovite, no Salutes were passed on him, of which he complained to the Governour; but that was easily answered, by saying, That he knew nothing of his coming down the River, and therefore hoped to be excu∣sed.

In fine, To Accommodate this Matter, it was agreed, That the Boats of the Mos∣covites should remove from the place where they first Landed, and by a Signal given by the Ambassador's Trumpets, the Guns should be fired, which was done both from the Castle, the Town, and the Fleet.

On the 15/25th of this Month of October, the Turkish Ambassadors arrived at two Hours distance from the Tents of the Me∣diators; but both sides having considered, that the Days being short, and that at such a distance from the Quarters of the Pleni∣potentiaries, much time would be spent and lost in going to and fro, it was con∣cluded, That the English and Dutch Am∣bassadors should go to Carlowitz, and the Germans and Allies should take their Quar∣ters about half an Hour above them to∣wards Peter Waradin, and the Turks about a Quarter of an Hour below towards Bel∣grade.

Upon the Arrival of the Mediators at Carlowitz, they were received by the Ger∣man Horse and Foot, and a Captain-Lieu∣tenant and a Standard, with 50 Horse, and also with another Captain-Lieutenant, and an Ensign, with 70 Foot, which were ap∣pointed to each Ambassador for the Medi∣ators Guards. The Turkish Soldiers were at the Right of the English Ambassador, and at the Left of the Dutch.

On the 20/30th the Plenipotentiaries were showed to each other; and shortly after the Conferences began; but first the Pre∣parations were making for building the House for Conferences: But in the mean time to supply that Convenience, a great Tent was rais'd in the midst of that void place which was between the Tents of the Mediators; where it was farther ordered, That instead of Chambers for the several Parties, there should be Tents pitched on both sides.

Some Points were here projected to be agreed on, as Preliminaries regulating the Ceremonies of the Congress; about which the Poles gave some trouble at the begin∣ning, who seemed rather to hinder than to forward the Peace; for the Disputes they made upon nothing, took up seven Days time; the which being at length o∣vercome,

* 4.8On the 6th of November, N.S. all the Preliminary Points were adjusted, and a∣greed by all the Allies,* 4.9 which tended chief∣ly to prevent and avoid all Contests about Precedence, and the disannulling all use∣less Ceremonies, during the Congress, as well as those Impediments which might cause Confusion and Disturbance.

The Articles for Facilitating the Negotiation, were these.

I.

TO take away Notifications, and Visits of Ceremony and Precedence.

II.

That every Plenipotentiary shall advance his own Business, without being obliged to stay for one another, which in that case is to be put into the Hands of the Mediators, until the time that the General Subscription is made.

III.

That no Plenipotentiary shall hinder or delay the Progress of the Treaty; but that every one shall endeavour to assist each other in re∣moving the Difficulties which obstruct the way.

IV.

For confirming the District of Neutrality, and covering the several Ambassadors, and their Retinues from Insults and Wrongs, both during their Abode at the place of Treaty, and their Departure thence.

V.

And for keeping the Train and Domesticks of each Ambassador in order, and that no Di∣sturbance, or Quarrel might arise between them, it was Ordered,

VI.

That a Prohibition should be given to eve∣ry one to stir Abroad at Night; and that whosoever should be caught Abroad after the Sun was Set, should be kept in the Custody of the Guards until Morning, and then to be delivered into the Hands of the Ambassador to whom he belongs, to be punished.

The Points were Signed and Sealed by the Ambassadors at Carlowitz, the 26th of October, or the 6th of November, N.S.

On the 2/13 of November, the Ambassador from the Emperor, appeared in the Camp of Carlovitz; as also did those from the Sultan, who placed themselves on both sides, not far from the House appointed for the Conferences to be held, and not far from the Places where the Mediators had their Lodgings, in which void Places several Magnificent and Stately Tents were erected; at which, about nine of the Clock in the Morning, the Emperor's Ambassa∣dor arrived, being attended with four Coaches of State, and a Numerous Re∣tinue.

And in the first place they went to the Tents of the Mediators, where at the same time appeared the Turkish Ambassador, attended with a very stately Retinue of Cavaliers, well mounted on Horses of the finest Shapes that could be found in all Quarters of the Eastern World, and be∣sides their Cloathing which was very rich, they made as beautiful an Appearance, as the Germans had done before them: And both Parties at the same time presented themselves before the Mediators, in the Tent appointed for the Conferences: Where after the Salutations, and Comple∣ments on both sides, sufficiently Courte∣ous and Obliging, they took their Seats in the middle of the Tent, purposely set, and laid for them, one directly against the o∣ther, in such a manner, that no Person could take Exception against his Place, or Seat appointed for him.

This being agreed and setled, the first Conference began, which was to determine this Great and Solemn Peace, which was the first of this kind, that ever passed be∣tween the Christians and the Turks; not but that several Treaties and Conclusions of Articles had passed before, but not on such equal Terms, and with so much Ho∣nour, and Deference given to Christian Mediators, which will be recorded in all Ages, to the Glory of William the Third, King of Great-Britain, and of the States-General, His Worthy and Wise Al∣lies.

Nor will it be less Memorable in Ho∣nour of that Noble and Ancient Family of the Lord Paget; who with the Heer Colyer, Ambassador from the Lords the States-Ge∣neral of the United Provinces, bore so great a share in this Everlasting, and never to be forgotten Treaty.

The Tent appointed for this Congress had four Doors, which fronted each other, at one of which entered the Imperial Am∣bassador, and at the opposite thereunto en∣tered the Turkish; and at the two others, which were likewise opposite, entered the Mediators.

The Imperial Ambassador, was Named the Most Excellent Lord the Count of Ot∣tingen: And on the Turkish side was the Reis Effendi, which I take to be principal Secretary of State with us.

Behind the Emperor's Ambassador the Secretary of the Embassy was placed; as also at a small Table behind the English Mediator, was placed the English Secreta∣ry: And behind the Ottoman Ambassador the Turkish Secretary, called Mauro Cordato, by Extraction a Greek, and of that Rite, or Religion; he stood a while behind the Turkish Ambassador upon his Legs, but af∣terwards was ordered to sit on the Ground after the Turkish Fashion; both which Se∣cretaries took the Minutes, or Protocollo of what was propounded, or what pas∣sed.

The Doors of the Tent was on all sides guarded equally by Germans and Turks, and both filled up the Doors of the Tent, amongst which were many Commanding Officers, who had room sufficient to see every thing that passed: The Conferences began commonly about ten a Clock, or half an Hour past ten in the Morning, and lasted until half an Hour past two in the Afternoon: And then ended the first Day of Conference.

On the 4/14th the Imperial Ambassador dispatched a Messenger by way of Peter Waradin towards the Places where the Re∣giment of Corbelli, and the two Battalions of Anhalt, and Turcheim, were Quartered, which were setled there for Guards near to the Congress; as also for the same rea∣son had appointed 200 Horse of the first Rank, and 100 Foot of the second: Like∣wise the Turkish Ministers remanded to Bel∣grade as many of their People, as they could well spare.

The same Day that this Exchange was made, the Plenipotentiaries from the Sul∣tan not being used to sit upon Stools, or Chairs, but very uneasily, caused a Safraw to be placed for them, covered with rich Carpets, and Embroidered Cushions, upon which they sate Cross-legg'd after the Turkish Fashion.

After which the Company rising, the Imperial Ambassador went to Dinner with the Mediators, where having remained for the space of about two Hours, they returned to the Conference about three a Clock, which continued until half an Hour past four in the Evening.

The next Day being the 5/15, the Impe∣rial Ambassador appeared at the place of the Conference in most Rich and Pompous Habit in Honour to the Day, which was the Emperor's Birth-Day; and which af∣ter the Conference was ended, was ho∣noured with a most splendid and stately Dinner, and Entertainment.

The 6/18 the Plenipotentiaries again as∣sembled about ten a Clock in the Morn∣ing, which continued with much diligence until eight a Clock in the Evening.

The 7/17th the Venetian Ambassador came for the first time with a most splendid E∣quipage to the Conference, in which that whole Day was entirely spent.

On the 7/17th, the Turks made a Proposi∣tion to have the Principality of Transylva∣nia to be restored to its pristine State and Condition, but so as to remain under the Emperor's Protection; but this Point was positively rejected by the Imperialists, the which not taking.

On the 11/21, the Turks made another Of∣fer about this Principality, leaving it wholly in the Power and Possession of the Emperor, stipulating howsoever, That an Honorary Tribute should be paid unto the Port for the same, but this was likewise rejected by the Imperialists: For the truth is, the Emperor would hearken to nothing which could give the Turks any Footing or Demand upon Transylvania, which is the Entrance, and the Lock and Key into the Upper Hungary, and into Germany it self.

So on the 14/24, after long Debates on both sides, the Point of Transylvania was agreed in the same manner as proposed by the Germans.

The 15/25th was entirely spent upon the Argument of the Limits, in which things were so prepared, that

On the 16/16th a good progress was made about the Regulation of the Confines; and before they arose, or separated for that E∣vening, it was agreed, which of the other Allies should have their Business come next to the Conference, and was agreed, That it should be the Venetians, which was the more easily assented unto, because they had agreed with the Imperialists to treat upon the Foot of Uti Possidetis.

Accordingly on the 17/17, the Venetian Ambassadors met the Turks, and had a long Conference with them, but the Turks ma∣king some new Demands, which the Am∣bassadors not being prepared to answer, or to gratifie them in, it ended for that Day without any Determination.

The 18/28th, the Venetians renewed their former Conference, where the same Diffi∣culties offering and not removed, all end∣ed again without any farther positive Re∣solution.

The 19/29 the Moscovite Ambassador went to Conference, in which having held a Discourse only in general Terms, without entering upon Particulars, nothing was concluded, or determined for that Day.

The 20/30 was spent by the Mediators in going between the Plenipotentiaries to dis∣pose them towards the ultimate Agree∣ment.

The 21st of November, or first of De∣cember, the Imperialists had a Conference with the Turks in the Morning, at which they proceeded yet farther in adjusting and setling the Limits of each Empire: And the same Day in the Afternoon the Polish Ambassador went to Conference; at which his Discourse was loose and general, so that nothing was concluded for that time.

The next Day being the 22d of Novem∣ber, or the 2d of December, the Moscovite Ambassador had another Conference with the Turks, who pretended the Cession, or Demolition of the Places Conquered by the Czar, but that Demand was rejected, the Ambassador saying, That he would nei∣ther give unto, nor take any thing from the Turks; but that his Master required the Fortress of Keres from the Cham of Tar∣tary.

The 23d of November, or the 3d of De∣cember, the Ambassador of Poland began to abate, and remit something of his high Demands, which gave some hopes of an Accommodation between the Poles and the Turks, in case an Equivalent could be found for the Town and Fortress of Ca∣minieck.

The 24/4 in the Afternoon the Venetian Ambassador had a Conference which lasted until Night, but could come to no satisfa∣ctory Resolution; the Turks still adhering

to their Demands, that several places should be razed, which are in the Possessi∣on of the Venetians, which the Ambassa∣dor alledged that he had not power to grant.

The 25/5th the Polish Ambassador went again to Conference, after which, it was observed, That the Turks dispatch∣ed an Express Courier to the Port there∣upon.

The 26/6 in the Afternoon, the Imperia∣lists went again to Conference, but con∣cluded nothing for that time.

The 28/8 the Imperialists had another Conference with the Turks, which held from nine a Clock in the Morning, till five in the Afternoon; during which time the Articles between the Emperor and the Sul∣tan were for the most part agreed.

The 29/9th the Imperial Ambassador held another Conference with the Turks, but that Day was for the most part spent in Debates without any conclusion.

The 30/10th my Lord Paget went to the Ottoman Ambassador in the Morning, and to the Imperialists in the Afternoon, en∣deavouring to dispose both Parties to a Peace.

December 1/11th the Imperial Ambassador had this Day the tenth Conference with the Turks, at which the remaining Articles were debated and agreed, so that little or nothing was wanting to perfect the Em∣peror's Treaty.

On the 2/12th the Moscovite Ambassador was at Conference from 10 a Clock to 12 at Noon: At which the Turks required the Demolition, and Restitution of Dogan Ca∣lusi, and three other Forts which the Czar holds upon the Boristhenes, to which the Moscovites would give no ear; howsoever they relinquished their Pretensions upon Keres; so that it was not doubted but that a Medium might now be easily found to compose Matters remaining.

The 3/13th was spent by the Mediators in trying to rectifie some Mistakes and Misunderstandings which might remove some Difficulties.

The 4/14th the Polish Ambassador was at Conference, at which four Articles were drawn and agreed unto.

In one of which there was yielded unto the Turks the Castles which the Poles then had, and possessed in Moldavia.

In another, it was agreed, That in Ex∣change for those Castles, the strong For∣tress of Caminieck, and the Provinces of Podolia, and Ukrania, should be Surren∣dered into the Hands of the Poles.

The 5/15 was spent in preparing Matters for a farther Progress.

The 6/16 the Imperialists went to Confe∣rence with an Intention to reduce the Ar∣ticles which were already agreed, into or∣der, but the Turks not having fully finished the Translation of them, it was deferred to another Convention.

On the 7/17th, the Moscovite delivered in∣to the Hands of my Lord Paget, the Arti∣cles which he had promised to consign to the Mediation.

And accordingly on the 8/18th, he sent a Supplement thereunto, which did not an∣swer expectation, so that Business remain∣ed for some time undetermined.

The next Day 9/19 the Polish Ambassador had another Conference with the Turks, at which the remaining Points of the Treaty were agreed upon; so that in a manner that whole Peace was agreed, and fini∣shed.

The 10/20th of December, the Venetian Ambassador communicated a new Com∣mission, and Project which he had received from the State of Venice to the Media∣tors.

And in the Afternoon the Moscovite Am∣bassador entertained a Discourse with the Mediators, and Mauro Cordato, but at that Meeting they cleared no Business.

With these frequent Conferences on all sides, much time passed away, until Christ∣mas approached, and then was the Season that Labours should give place to Devoti∣on and Mirth, and to the Solemnities of that Festival, which continued until the Twelve Days were over; and then all sides began again, after the Plenipotentia∣ry Ambassadors had passed their time very Jovially, to renew again their Treaties: Only the Turkish Ambassadors having lit∣tle to do with the Christian Rites, wished heartily that the Feasts were over, and pressed heartily for an end thereof; al∣ledging, That their Presence was required at the Port, and that the Sultan would no longer allow of their Absence.

The first that betook himself to Busi∣ness, (which was strange) was the Mosco∣vite Ambassador, who on the 14/24th of Ja∣n sary 1699, was the first who Subscribed the Instrument of Amnesty, and the Trea∣ties of the Peace of the Emperor, and Po∣land, with the Port, were Signed on the 16/26th by their Ambassadors: And the Ve∣netian Treaty being very well adjusted and perfected, all Parties appeared to be very well satisfied; and the Venetian Ambassa∣dor as well as the others, tho' for want of sufficient Power, he could not then Sign his Instrument, but supposed that Orders would come to him for doing the same, be∣fore the Imperial Ratifications, which were to be exchanged on the Line of Limits be∣tween Peter Waradin, and Belgrade, could be dispatched, in which case the Media∣tors had Power to receive it. Monday the 16/26 of January was appointed for the Solemn Day of Signature.

Monday the 16/26th of January, was the So∣lemn Day of Signature, the which having been passed in the Morning, all the Am∣bassadors, Turks as well as Christians, with all their Attendants, Guards, &c. with many Persons of Quality out of the Coun∣try, making about 5000 Persons, Dined at my Lord Paget's Quarters, at whose Table, the King of England's Health was the first that was drank, then the Empe∣ror's, and the lasting Continuance of the Peace, which was Signed that very Day: And then we may believe, and fansie, that most People there present were all heartily Merry, with as much Solemnity as that Place could afford: And amongst other things of Mirth it was observed, That my Lord Paget had an Oxe Roasted whole for the Soldiers, a thing never known be∣fore in those Parts.

On the 17/27th, the Mediators Dined with the Emperor's Ambassadors, where they were entertained with the like Rejoycings, and in the Evening with Fire-Works, Foun∣tains of Wine, Drums, Trumpets, Mu∣sick, and with the Discharge of Great and Small Guns.

The 18/28th, the Moscovite Ambassador took his leave of my Lord Paget, with many Lofty Expressions of Civility and Acknowledgments.

The 19/29th, my Lord Paget Visited the Imperial Ambassadors, as he did the Turks on the 20/30th, and 21/31st, which was in return of that Compliment which the Turks had made to him some time after the first Conferences.

The 21st of January, or the first of Fe∣bruary, the Turks were to visit the Imperial Ambassadors, and to take their leaves of them.

On the 24/3th, the Imperialists were to take their Leaves of the Turks, and return their Visit.

And on the 24/4th or 25/5th in the Morn∣ing, the Mediators, and Turks, design∣ed to take their Journey towards Bel∣grade, where the Mediators were to con∣tinue until the Exchange of the Ratifica∣tions.

The 26th at Night, O.S. the Polish Am∣bassador departed by the Post, after ha∣ving passed many high Complements on my Lord Pagett, expressing the Transport he was in, for the Successful Assistances he had received from His Excellency in the Management and Conclusion of his Busi∣ness.

The Muscovite Ambassador also declared, That he would leave Peter Waradin on the 2/12th of February; and in three or four Days after which, the Mediators declared, That the Place of Congress was likely to be quite cleared.

The House of Conference was bestow∣ed by Count Ottingen on the Franciscan Fryars, who at the same time declared, That their Intentions were to make a Church thereof, in memory of that Peace which had been there transacted.

For which God be praised; which be∣ing of a High Concernment to all Chri∣stendom, and to which the knowledge of the particular Articles may be useful to all Nations, we have thought fit to add them hereunto in Latin and English, as here fol∣loweth.

[ 1699] INSTRUMENTUM PACIS Caesareo-Ottomanicum, Subscriptum Januarii 26. 1699.

AD perpetuam rei memoriam, Notum sit omnibus & singulis, quorum interest, posteaquam per sedecim hucusque anno saevum, exitiale, & multâ humani Sanguinis effu∣sione cruentum adeò bellum, cum pluri∣marum Provinciarum desolatione gestum esset inter Serenissimum, & Potentissimum Principem & Dominum Leopoldum; Ele∣ctum Romanorum Imperatorem semper Augustum, Germaniae, Hungariae, Bohe∣miae, Dalmatiae, Croatiae, Sclavoniae Re∣gem, Archiducem Austriae, Ducem Bur∣gundiae, Brabantiae, Styriae, Carinthiae, Carniolae, Marchionem Moraviae, Ducem Luxemburgiae, Superioris & Inferioris Si∣lesiae, Wirtembergae, & Teckae, Principem Sueviae, Comitem Habspurgi, Tyrolis, Kyburgi & Gotitiae, Marchionem Sacri Romani Imperii, Burgoviae, ac Superioris & Inferioris Lusatiae, Dominum Marchiae Sclavinicae, Portus Naonis & Salinarum, &c. ab una: Et Serenissimum, atque Po∣tentissimum Principem & Dominum Sul∣tanum Mustapha Han Ottomannorum Im∣peratotem, ac Asiae & Graeciae ejusque glo∣riosos Praedecessores ab altera parte, miser∣tique tandem afflictae Subditorum Sortis summè dicti ambo Potentissimi Impera∣tores finem tantis in perniciem Generis Humani indies augescentibus malis ponere, seriò in animum induxissent, factum Di∣vinâ bonitate esse, ut annitentibus, & Conciliantibus Serenissimo, & Potentissimo Principe, & Domino Guillielmo Tertio, Magnae Britanniae, Franciae, & Hiberniae Rege, uti & Celsis ac Praepotentibus Do∣minis Ordinibus Generalibus Unitarum Bel∣gii Provinciarum Solennes ea de causa Tractatus Carlovizii in Sirmio propè Con∣finia utriusque Imperii instituti atque ad finem perducti fuerint. Comparentes quippe dicto loco utrinque legitimè con∣stituti Plenipotentiarii nomine quidem Sa∣crae Caesareae, & Romanorum Imperatoriae Majestatis, Illustrissimi & Excellentissimi Domini, Dominus Wolffgangus Sacri Ro∣mani Imperii Comes ab Oettingen Sacrae Caesareae Majestatis Cubicularius, Consili∣arius intimus; & Consilii Imperialis Aulici Praeses: Et Dominus Leopoldus Schlik Sacri Romani Imperii Comes in Passaun, & Weiskirchen, ejusdem Sacrae Caesareae Majestatis Cubicularius Generalis, Vigilia∣rum Praefectus, & Legionis Desultoriorum Equitum Tribunus: ambo ad Tractatus hosce Pacis cum Porta Ottomannica depu∣tati legati Extraordinarii, & Plenipoten∣tiarii: nomine verò imperialis Ottomanni∣cae Majestatis, Illustrissimi & Excellentissi∣mi Domini, Dominus Mehemet Effendi, Supremus Imperii Ottomannici Cancella∣rius & Dominus Alexander Mauro Cor∣dato ex nobili Stirpe de Scarlati intimus jam dicti Imperii Consiliarius, & Secreta∣rius, interventu & operâ Illustrissimorum, & Excellentissimorum Dominorum, Domi∣ni Guilielmi Paget, Baronis de Beaudesert, Serenissimi Magnae Britanniae Regis, & Domini Jacobi Colyer, Celsorum & Prae∣potentium Generalium Foederati Belgii Or∣dinum, amborum apud Excelsam Portam Ottomannicam oratorum & ad restabili∣endam pacem universalem legatorum Ple∣nipotentiariorum, qui munere Mediatoris integre, sedulo & prudenter perfuncti sunt: post invocatam aeterni Numinis opem, & commutatas rite mandatorum tabulas ad Divini Nominis gloriam, & utriusque Im∣perii Salutem, in sequentes viginti mutuas Pacis, & concordiae leges convenerunt.

I.

REGIO Transylvaniae, quemadmo∣dum, de praesenti est in possessione, & potestatate Caes. Majestatis, ita maneat in ejusdem Dominio: Et à Podoliae con∣finio, usque ad extremum Vallachiae Con∣finium, suis Montibus, qui antiqui fue∣runt limites ante praesens bellum inter Transylvaniam ex una parte, & Moldavi∣am atque Vallachiam ex alia parte, atque à Confinio Vallachiae usque ad Flumen Marusum, pariter suis Montibus, qui an∣tiqui fuerunt limites, circumscribatur, & sic utrinque observatis antiquis Limitibus, nec ultrà nec citrà ab utroque Imperio fieri possit extensio.

II.

Provincia Subjecta Arci Temeswarinen∣si cum omnibus fuis districtibus, & inter∣fluentibus Fluviis maneat in possessione, & potestate Excelsi imperii Ottomannici, at∣que à parte Transylvaniae fines ejus sint ab extremo confinio Vallachiae usque ad Flu∣vium Marusium in Superiori Articulo con∣stituti Transylvaniae antiqui Limites. Tum à parte Marusii usque ad Fluvium Tibis∣cum citerioribus ripis ejusdem Marusii, & à parte Tibisci usque ad Danubium ci∣terioribus ripis Fluvii Tibisci fines ejus li∣mitentur: Quae vero intra praedictos li∣mites sita sunt loca, nempe Caransebes, Lugos, Lippa, Csanad, Kiscanisia, Betsche, Betskerech, & Sablia citerius & intra prae∣constitutos ante praesens bellum praedecla∣ratam rationem intra ripas Fluminum Ma∣rusii & Tibisci in Temeswarinensibus Ter∣ritoriis, qualiscunque alius similis locus reperiatur, eâ conditione destruantur per Caesareos, ut vi Pactorum amplius reaedi∣ficari non possint: Et praedicta Regio Temeswarinensis omnino libera relinqua∣tur, & imposterum neque in dictis hisce locis, neque prope ripas Fluviorum Ma∣rusii atque Tibisci alia vel majora vel mi∣nora loca, quae possint Speciem Fortifica∣tionis exhibere, exstruantur.

Fluviorum Marusiii ac Tibisci inter Pro∣vinciam Temeswarinensem, & Provincias Caesareae potestati, & possessioni subjectas usus sit communis Subditis utriusque im∣perii, tum ad potum pecorum omnis ge∣neris, tum ad piscationem, & alias com∣moditates Subditis perquam necessarias.

Cum verò onerariae Naves à partibus Superioribus Subjectis Caesareo Dominio, tum per Marusium Fluvium in Tibiscum, tum per Tibiscum in Danubium, sive as∣cendendo sive descendendo ultrò citroque meantes nullo obice praepediri debeant, navigatio Navium Germanicarum, aut ali∣orum Subditorum Caesareorum, nullo mo∣do possit in cursu suo ultrò citróque incom∣modari, sed liberè atque commodissimè fiat ubique in praedictis duobus Fluviis: Et si quidem reciprocae amicitiae & mutuae benevolentiae convenientia id etiam requi∣rat, ut Subditi imperiali Ottomanicae po∣testati subjecti possint usûs praedictorum Fluviorum esse participes, sine impedi∣mento Navibus piscatoriis etiam ac Cym∣bis utantur.

Molendinariae autem Naves in locis tan∣tum, quibus Navigationi alterius, nempe Caesarei Dominii, nullatenus impedimen∣to esse possint, communicatione Guberna∣torum utriusque Dominii, & consensu po∣nantur: quinimò ne diversione aquarum in Marusio cursus Caesarearum Navium in∣commodum aliquod patiatur, nullatenus permittetur, ut sive Molendinorum, sive alia occasione ex Marusio aquae alio deri∣ventur seu diducantur.

Insulae quaecunque in praedictis Fluviis, cum actu sint in potestate Caesarea, ma∣neant, uti possidentur: & subditi utrius∣que Dominii omnino pacificè atque tran∣quillè vivant, Severissimisque Edictis ab insolentiis, & contraventione Pactorum contineantur.

III.

Cum Regio inter Fluvios Tibiscum, & Danubium vulgò dicta Batska sit in sola possessione & potestate Caesareae Majesta∣tis, sic maneat deinceps etiam in praefata potestate, & Dominio Caesareo, neque Titelium magis quam in praesenti est, for∣tificetur.

IV.

Ab extrema ripa citeriore Tibisci, op∣posita Titelianae ripae & angulo terrae ibi∣dem per conjunctionem Tibisci, & Da∣nubii terminato deducatur linea recta us∣que in ripam Danubii: Item è regione citerioris ripae Tibiscanae sitam, & ulterius protrahatur pariter recta ad Moravizii ri∣pam citeriorem amnis Bossut, & inde ad locum usque ubi praedictus amnis Bossut principali alveo in Savum illabitur: & Mo∣ravizio sine ulla Fortificatione relicto, ex∣structisque tantùm in opposita utrinque ripa, apertis pagis, separentur per prae∣dictam lineam firmatam atque distinctam sive fossis, sive lapidibus, sive palis, sive aliâ ratione Imperia sequenti mode: Regio Versus Belgradinum intra modò dictos li∣mites permaneat sub sola potestate Poten∣tissimi

Ottomannorum Imperatoris: Regio vero extra praedictam lineam sita, maneat sub sola potestate & possessione Potentissi∣mi! Romanorum Imperatoris: & secun∣dùm praedictos limites pariter possidean∣tur Fluvii qui sunt Territoriis permanenti∣bus in possessione utriusque partis.

V.

Ab ostio amnis Bossut in Savum efflu∣entis usque item in Savum elabentis Un∣nae Fluvii ostium Savi altera quidem pars pertinens ad Ditionem Caesaream possi∣deatur ab ejus Majestate, altera verò pars possideatur ab Imperatore Ottoman∣norum.

Interfluens Fluvius Savus, & Insulae in hoc communi tractu sitae, sint communes, & usus tum ad Navigationem ultrò citró∣que, tum ad alias commoditates utriusque partis Subditis pariter communis sit, u∣triusque religiosè observantibus, pacificum, & imperturbatum ultrò citróque commer∣cium; Usque ad Unnam Fluvium Regio pettinens ad Dominium Imperialis Otto∣mannicae Majestatis, quâ Bosniam spectat, citerioribus ripis Unnae Fluvii definiatur atque terminetur evacuatis Novi, Dubiz∣za, Jessenovizza, Doboy, & Brod ex parte Bosnensi: & qualicunque alio simili loco in hoc Tractu existente, & deductis inde Praesidiis Caesareis, ista pars omni modo libera relinquatur: Castanoviz au∣tem, & insulae infra Terram Novi versùs Savum cum ulterioribus ripis ejusdem Unnae, cum sint & maneant in potestate Romanorum Imperatoris, praedictis limi∣tibus hinc distinguantur.

Loca demum ultra Unnam longè à Sa∣vo sita, & ab utraque parte Praesidiis conservata atque possessa cum Terris ante praesens bellum ad eadem spectantibus, maneant iterum in potestate utriusque possidentis partis, ea Conditione, ut Com∣missarii utrinque mox deputandi Distri∣ctus atque Territoria singulatim deductis particularibus lineis separantes, per fos∣sas, lapides, palos, aut aliâ quacunque ratione, ad evitandam confusionem posita Signa, segregent atque disjungant, in partibus Croatiae usque ad ultimum Con∣finium, & terminum locorum in utriusque Dominii possessione permansurorum.

Et ex utraque parte, si quis ausus fue∣rit alterare, mutare, evellere, tollere, aut quovis modo violare aliquod ex praedictis Signis, ille per omnimodam inquisitio∣nem deprehensus ad exemplum aliorum severissimè puniatur.

Commissariis verò ad distinctionem, & positionem limitum in isto confinio quoad fieri poterit, quàm celerrimè deputandis Regiis Edictis demandetur, ut ad Tran∣quillitatem, & Securitatem Subditorum utriusque Dominii sedulo animum adhi∣bentes sine controversia, & sine quacun∣que particulari complacentia Terras optimè separent, atque manifestè distinguant.

Cùm siti in altera Savi parte, qua Do∣minium Imperiale Ottomannicum recipit, munimenti Brod Fortificationes utpote re∣center à Militiis Caesareis factae, tempore educendi Praesidii Caesarei, everti debeaut, locus autem ille sit commodissimus ad Mercaturam, poterit ibidem erigi cum honesto & commodo recinctu civitas, ita tamen ut in Arcis aut Munimenti formam non redigatur.

VI.

Definiti tandem per hosce Tractatus, & subsecutâ, ubi opus fuerit, locali Depu∣tatorum Commissariorum separatione sta∣biliti, sive deinceps idoneo tempore per operam Commissariorum utrinque stabili∣endi Confiniorum limites sanctè utrinque, & religiosè observentur, ita ut sub nulla ratione aut praetextu extendi, transferri, aut mutuari possint: neque liceat alicui paci∣scentium parti in alterius partis Territorium ultra statutos semel terminos, aut lineas quidquam Juris aut potestatis praetendere aut exercere, aut alterius partis Subditos sive ad deditionem, sive ad pendendum tri∣butum qualecumque, sive praeteritum, sive futurum, sive ad quamvis aliam humano ingenio excogitabilem exactionis aut vexa∣tionis speciem adigere aut molestare, sed omnis altercatio juste amoveatur.

VII.

Licitum & liberum esto utrique partium pro confiniorum suorum securitate quo∣cunque meliori visum fuerit modo, arces, munimenta, & loca per praesentes Tracta∣tus pacifice possessa, quaecunque de facto extant, reparare, munire, & fortificare, exceptis illis, de quibus utrinque nomina∣tim cautum est; ad Incolarum verò com∣modas habitationes in extremis Confiniis apertos pagos aedificare ubique sine im∣pedimento & sine exceptione utrique parti liceat, dummodo sub hoc praetextu Forta∣litia non erigantur.

VIII.

Incursiones hostiles, & occupationes, omnesque insultus clam aut ex improviso facti devastationes, & depopulationes Territorii utriusque Dominii omnino, & severissimis Mandatis prohibitae sint ac il∣licitae:

transgressores verò articuli hujus ubicunque deprehensi statim incarceren∣tur, & per Jurisdictionem loci, ubi cap∣tivati fuerint, pro merito puniantur absque ulla remissione, & rapta quaecunque sint diligentissimè perquisita, & adinventa, cum omni aequitate Dominis suis resti∣tuantur: Capitanei quoque ipsimet, Com∣mendantes, & Praefecti utriusque partis ad justitiam nullâ admissâ injuriâ in∣tegerrimè administrandam sub amissione officii non solum, sed etiam vitae, & honoris adstricti sint, atque obligati.

IX.

Maneat porrò etiam illicitum futu∣ris quoque temporibus, receptaculum vel fomentum dare malis Hominibus, re∣bellibus Subditis, aut malè contentis, sed ejusmodi Homines, & omnes prae∣dones, raptores, etiamsi alterius partis Subditi sint, quos in ditione sua depre∣henderint, merito supplicio afficere, utra∣que pars adstricta sit: qui si deprehen∣di nequeant, Capitaneis aut Praefectis eorum, sicubi eos latitare compertum fuerit, indicentur, iique illos puniendi Mandatum habeant: quod si nec hi officio suo in punitione talium scelera∣torum satisfecerint, indignationem Impe∣ratoris sui incurrant, aut officiis exuan∣tur, aut ipsimet poenas pro reis luant: Quoque magis nefariorum hujusmodi petulantiis cautum sit, neutri partium liceat intertenere, & alere Haydones, quos liberos nuncupant, Plagiarios Pri∣beck dictos, atque id genus facinoroso∣rum Hominum, qui non sunt alteru∣trius Principis stipendio conducti sed rapto vivunt, tamque ii quam qui eos aluerint, pro demerito puniantur; ta∣lesque nefarii, etiamsi consuetae vitae emendationem prae se ferant, nullam fidem mereantur nec prope confinia toleren∣tur, sed ad alia remotiora loca transfe∣rantur.

X.

Cum tempore praesentis hujus belli plures ex Hungaris & Transylvanis à Subjectione suae Caesareae Majestatis secedentes ad Consinia Excelsi Imperii sese receperint, atque hac in parte eti∣am conclusae per inducias inter utrumque imperium almae huic Paci debitis modis in futuram securitatem providendum sit, de praedictis ita pactum est, ut in diti∣onibus antè nominati Excelsi Imperii ad lubitum possint locari & accommodari: Ne tamen aliquo modo Consiniorum tranquillitas, & Subditorum quies per∣turbari queat, loca ubi praedicti colloca∣buntur, remota sint ab omnibus limita∣neis, & confiniariis partibus, & uxoribus illorum dabitur facultas sequendi mari∣tos suos, iisque in Imperatorio assigna∣to ad hoc districtum cohabitandi. Cum∣que imposterum in reliquos Subditos Po∣tentissimi Ottomannorum Imperatoris an∣numerandi veniant, non liceat illis à sub∣jectione ejusdem amplius recedere, & si qui recesserint, atque ad Patriam iterum reverti voluerint, in numero & conditione malevolorum recenseantur, neque illis à Caesareis fomentum aut receptaculum praebeatur, quinimo deprehensi Ottoman∣nis Confiniorum Gubernatoribus extra∣dantur, quo magis utrinque securitati Pacis prospiciatur.

XI.

Ad tollendas penitus quascunque in Confiniis super aliquo articulorum Ar∣mistitii hujus aut quavis de re imposte∣rum enascentes controversias, differenti∣as, aut discordias, ubi prompto & ma∣turo remedio opus sit ordinentur utrin∣que in Confiniis primo quoque tempore electi pari numero Commissarii viri neu∣tiquam avidi, sed graves, probi, pru∣dentes, experti, atque pacifici: Hique loco opportuno convenientes sine exer∣citu cum aequali pacificarum personarum comitiva, omnes & singulas hujusmodi controversias emergentes, audiant, cog∣noscant, decidant, & amicabiliter com∣ponant, talem denique ordinem, & mo∣dum constituant, quo utraque pars suos Homines, & Subditos citra omnem Ter∣giversationem vel praetextum gravissimis poenis ad sinceram ac firmam pacis ob∣servantiam compellat. Quod si verò ne∣gotia tanti momenti occurrerent, quae per Commissarios utriusque partis componi & expediri non possent, tunc ad ambos Potentissimos Imperatores remittantur, ut ipsi complanandis iisdem, sedandis, & extinguendis modum & rationem inve∣nire & adhibere valeant, ita, ut tales controversiae quàm fieri poterit intra bre∣vissimum temporis spatium componantur, nec earum resolutio ullâ ratione negliga∣tur, aut protrahatur.

Cúmque praeterea in antecedentibus Sacris Capitulationibus duella, & mutuae ad certamen provocationes fuerint veti∣tae, imposterum etiam sint illicitae; & si qui ad singulare certamen venire ausi fuerint, in illos ut transgressores gravis∣simè animadvertatur.

XII.

Captivi tempore praesentis belli ex utraque parte in captivitatem abacti, & in publicis carceribus adhuc superstites, cùm occasione istius almae Pacis elibera∣tionem tandem aliquando meritò sperent, nec possint sine laesione Majestatis Impe∣ratoriae, & laudatae consuetudinis in ea∣dem Captivitatis miseria, & calamitate relinqui: usitatis ab antiquo, vel ho∣nestioribus adhuc rationibus, per com∣mutationem in libertatem asserantur, & si plures, aut melioris conditionis in una quam in altera parte invenientur, pro reliquorum etiam eliberatione, quando Solennes legati instantias afferent, gra∣tiosa, & huic almae Paci conveniens u∣triusque Imperatoris pietas nequaquam denegetur: Caeteris verò, qui in priva∣torum potestate sunt, vel apud ipsos Tartaros, licitum sit eliberationem suam honesto, &, quam fieri poterit, mediocri lytro procutare; quòd si cum Captivi Domino honesta accommodatio fieri non poterit, Judices locorum litem omnem per compositionem dirimant: Sin autem praedictis viis id etiam confici haud pos∣set, Captivi pretiis eorum sive per te∣stimonia, sive per juramenta probatis at∣que solutis eliberentur. Nec possint Do∣mini aviditate majoris lucri sese redem∣ptioni eorundem opponere, & quando∣quidem ex parte Excelsi Imperii Otto∣mannici Homines non emitterentur, qui taliter eliberandis Captivis operam ad∣hibeant, spectabit ad probitatem Caesa∣reorum Praefectorum, ut ad dimittendum Ottomannos Captivos, quo empti sunt pretio sincere liquidato, Dominos illo∣rum adstringant, atque ita Sanctum hoc opus pari utrinque pietate promoveatur: quousque demùm Captivi utrinque prae∣dictae ratione eliberentur, legati Pleni∣potentiarii ex utraque parte officia sua adhibebunt, ut interea miseri Captivi be∣nignè tractentur.

XIII.

Pro Religiosis, ac Religionis Christi∣anae exercitio juxta ritum Romanum Catholicae Ecclesiae, quaecunque praece∣dentes gloriosissimi Ottomannorum Impe∣ratores in Regnis suis sive per antece∣dentes Sacras Capitulationes, sive per signa Imperialia, sive per Edicta, & Mandata Specialia favorabiliter concesse∣runt, ea omnia Serenissimus, & Poten∣tissimus Ottomannorum Imperator im∣posterum etiam observanda confirmabit, ita ut Ecclesias suas praefati Religiosi reparare atque resarcire possint, functio∣nes suas ab antiquo consuetas exerceant, & nemini permissum sit, contra Sacras Capitulationes, & contra leges Divinas aliquo genere molestiae, aut pecuniariae petitionis eosdem Religiosos cujuscunque ordinis, & conditionis assicere, sed con∣suetae Imperatoriâ pietate gaudeant, & fruantur. Praeterea Serenissimi, & Poten∣tissimi Romanorum Imperatoris solenni ad fulgidam Portam legato licitum sit, commissa sibi circa Religionem, & loca Christianae Visitationis in Sancta Civi∣tate Jerusalem existentia exponere, at∣que instantias suas ad Imperiale solium afferre.

XIV.

Commercia juxta antecedentes etiam Sacras Capitulationes libera sint 〈◊〉〈◊〉 que partis subditis, in omnibus Impe∣riorum Regnis, & Ditionibus; ut autem utrique parti utili ratione, & sine frau∣de, & dolo peragantur, inter Deputatos Commissarios rem mercatoriam bene in∣telligentes tempore solennium utrinque Legationum contractabitur, & sicuti cum aliis Excelsi Imperii amicis Nationibus observatum est, ita etiam subditi cujus∣cunque Nationis Caesareae Majestatis se∣curitate, & utilitate Commerciorum in Regnis Excelsi Imperii idoneis modis, & usitatis Privilegiis gaudebunt, & per∣fruentur.

XV.

Quaecunque conditiones in antiquis Sacris Capitulationibus expressae sunt, nec praedictis Punctis hoc Tractatu sti∣pulatis, aut liberrimo cujusque possiden∣tium Dominio, & usui ejusdem adver∣santur, aut praejudicant, posthac etiam colantur sanctè, & observentur, cassatis & annullatis iis, quae supradictis quocunque modo repugnant.

XVI.

Ut quoque tantò magis Armistitium hoc bonáque inter ambos Potentissimos Imperatores amicitia firmetur, ac coales∣cat, mittentur Solennes utrinque legati ex quo usitatis caeremonialibus ab in∣troitu in Confinia usque ad reditum in locum secundae permutationis excipiendi, honorandi, tractandi atque prosequendi, qui in signum amicitiae Spontaneum munus, conveniens tamen, & utriusque Imperatoris dignitati consentaneum affe∣rent;

Et primâ aestate in mense Junio iter, praeviae mutuâ correspondentiâ, uno eodemque tempore suscipientes in Sirmi∣ensi confinio, more jam pridem inter u∣trumque imperium observato, permuta∣buntur. Solennibus porrò legatis in Im∣peratoriis Aulis, quidquid libuerit, petere liceat, ac permittatur.

XVII.

Regula, & norma Curialium in reci∣piendis receptisque pariter honorandis, & tractandis Ministris ultrò citróque commeantibus, & commorantibus juxta usitatam, prioribus etiam temporibus mo∣dalitatem deinceps ab utrinque cum aequa∣li decore, & secundum distinctam chara∣cteris missorum praerogativam observetur. Legatis Caesareis, & Residentibus, & qui∣busvis eorundem Hominibus pro suo arbitrio quibuscunque placuerit Vestibus uti licitum sit, néve quisquam impedi∣mento esse possit. Ministri porrò Caesa∣rei, sive oratoris, sive legati, sive Resi∣dentis, sive Agentis munere fungantur, quibus reliquorum Principum Fulgidae Portae amicorum legati, & Agentes im∣munitatibus, & Privilegiis perfruuntur eaedem libertate, imò ad distinguendam Caesareae dignitatis praerogativam usitatis melioribus modis fruantur, habeantque liberam potestatem conducendi interpre∣tes: Cursores etiam, & alii eorum Ho∣mines Viennâ ad Fulgidam Portam, atque iterum redeuntes, & ultrò citróque veni∣entes Salvo passu tutò, & securè per∣meent, atque ut commodè iter suum per∣ficiant, omni favore coadjuventur.

XVIII.

Pax ista quamvis secundum propositas conditiones conclusa, tum demum inte∣grum ex omni parte robur obligationis, & debitae observantiae vinculum accipiet & inducet, cum omnia, & singula, quae de Confiniis suprà recensito modo ultrò citróque promissa, & acceptata sunt, tam de distinctionibus limitum, quàm de eva∣cuationibus, & demolitionibus plenarie in effectum, & executionem deducta fue∣rint, ita ut absolutae designatione limi∣tum in unoquoque Confinio statim subse∣quatur demolitio, aut evacuatio, quod ut quam celerrimè succedat, designentur ad limites, & terminos Confiniorum ponen∣dos, & distinguendos, ex utraque parte Commissarii, qui die Aequinoctii, scilicet 22. mensis Martii, aut 12 secundum ve∣terem Stylum, Anni Millesimi Sexcente∣simi Nonagesimi noni in locis inter Com∣missarios consensu Gubernatorum utrius∣que Confinii determinandis, mediocri, & pacifico Comitatu conveniant, atque intra spatium duorum Mensium, si possibile sit, aut etiam citius, ubi fieri poterit, Confinia limitibus, & terminis manifestis per superiores articulos constitutis di∣stinguant, separent, determinent, & Sta∣tuta inter legatos Plenipotentiarios utri∣usque imperii accuratissimè, & citissimè exequantur.

XIX.

Has vero conditiones, & articulos ad formam hic mutuò placitam à Majestati∣bus utriusque Imperatoris ratihabitum iri, atque ut solennia ratificationis Diplomata intra spatium triginta dierum à die Sub∣scriptionis vel citius in Confiniis per Il∣lustrissimos & Excellentissimos legatos Plenipotentiarios Mediatores reciprocè recteque commutentur, legati Plenipoten∣tiarii utriusque imperii sese infallibilitèr obligant, atque praestituros compromit∣tunt.

XX.

Duret Armistitium hocce, & exten∣datur, (favente Deo) ad viginti quinque Annos continuè sequentes à die, qua ejusdem subscriptio facta fuerit; quo Annorum numero clapso, vel etiam me∣dio tempore priusquam elabatur, liberum esto utrique partium, si ità placuerit, Pacem hanc ad plures adhuc Annos pro∣rogare.

Itaque mutuo, & libero consensu quae∣cunque stabilita sunt Pacta inter Majesta∣tem Serenissimi, & Potentissimi Ramano∣rum Imperatoris, & Majestatem Serenis∣simi & Potentissimi Ottommannorum Im∣peratoris & Haeredes eorundem imperia quoque & Regna ipsorum: Terrâ item marique sitas, Regiones, civitates, urbes, subditos, & clientes observentur sanctè, religiosè, ac inviolabiliter, & demande∣tur seriò omnibus utriusque partis Gu∣bernatoribus, Praefectis, Ducibus Exerci∣tuum, atque Militiis, & quibusvis in eo∣rundem clientela, obedientiae & subjecti∣oni existentibus, ut illi quoque praede∣claratis conditionibus, clausulis, pactis, & articulis sese adaequatè conformantes omnibus modis caveant; ne contra Pacem, & amicitiam hanc sub quocunque nomi∣ne, aut praetextu, se invicem offendant, aut damnificent, sed quolibet prorsus ini∣micitiae genere abstinendo bonam colant vicinitatem, certò scientes, quod si cate∣nus admoniti morem non gesserint, se∣verissimis

in se poenis animadvertendum fore.

Ipse quoque Crimensis Chanus, & omnes Tartarorum Gentes quovis nomi∣ne vocitatae ad Pacis hujus, & bonae vi∣cinitatis, & reconciliationis Jura ritè ob∣servanda adstricti sint, nec iisdem con∣traveniendo, hostilitates qualescunque ex∣erceant erga quasvis Caesareas Provincias, earumque Subditos aut Clientes: Porro sive ex aliis Exercituum generibus, sive ex Nationibus Tartarorum, si quis con∣tra Sacras Imperatorias hasce Capitula∣tiones, & contra Pacta, & Articulos ea∣rum quidpiam ausus fuerit, is poenis rigorosissimis coerceatur.

Incipiat verò modo dicta Pax, Quies, & Securitas subditorum utriusque Imperii à supradata die Subscriptionis, & cessent exinde, atque sustollantur omnes utrinque inimicitiae, & Subditi utriusque partis se∣curitate, & tranquillitate fruantur; Eo∣que fine, & quò magis per summam cu∣ram, ac sedulitatem hostilitates inhiberi possint, transmittantur quàm celerrimè Mandata, & Edicta publicandae Pacis ad omnes confiniorum Praefectos, cumque spatium aliquod temporis requiratur, in∣tra quod officiales in remotioribus prae∣sertim Confiniis istam conclusae Pacis no∣titiam obtinere valeant, statuuntur vi∣ginti dies pro termino, post quem si quis hostile quidpiam alterutra ex parte ad∣mittere praesumpserit, poenis superius de∣claratis irremissibiliter subjaceat.

Ut demum Pacis Conditiones Viginti hisce articulis conclusae utrinque accepta∣tae, & debito summóque cum respectu in∣violatae observentur: Si quidem Domini Plenipotentiarii Ottomannici vi concessae iisdem facultatis Imperatoriae instrumen∣tum Turcico sermone exaratum, & sub∣scriptum, legitimum, & validum nobis exhibuerint: Nos quoque vi Mandati, & Plenipotentia nostra, propriis mani∣bus, & propriis Sigillis Subscriptas, & Signatas hasce Pactorum literas in Latino Idiomate tanquam legitimum, & validum vicissim Instrumentum extradidimus.

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

[ 1699] THE INSTRUMENT OF THE Treaty of Peace, BETWIXT THE GERMAN and OTTOMAN Empires, Subscrib'd, January 26. 1699.

FOR the perpetual Memory of the Thing, Be it known to all whom it may Concern, That after a cruel and pernicious War had for 17 years been carried on with the Effusion of much Blood and Desolation of many Provinces, between the most Serene and most Potent Prince and Lord Leopold, Elect of the Romans, and Emperor of Germany, always August, King of Hun∣garia, Bohemia, Dalmatia, Croatia, Scla∣vonia, Arch-Duke of Austria, Duke of Burgundy, Brabant, Styria, Carinthia, Car∣niola, Marquis of Moravia, Duke of Lux∣emburgh, of the Upper and Lower Silesia, of Wirtemberg and Tecka, Prince of Swe∣via, Count of Habsburgh, of Tyrol, Ky∣burgh and Goritia, Marquis of the Sacred Roman Empire, of Burgovia, of the Upper and Lower Lusatia, Lord of the Marqui∣sate of Sclavinia, of the Port of Naon, and the Salt Mines, on one part: And between the most Serene and most Potent Prince and Lord, Sultan Mustapha Han, Emperor of the Ottomans, and of Asia and Greece, and his Glorious Predecessors, on the other Part. These two most Po∣tent Emperors, out of a just Sense of Compassion towards their afflicted Sub∣jects, at length, resolving to put an End to these Mischiefs every Day encreasing with Destruction to Mankind, the Divine Goodness brought it to pass, that by the Endeavours and Mediation of the most Serene and most Potent Prince and Lord, William III. King of Great Britain, France, and Ireland, and the High and Mighty Lords, the States General of the United Belgic Provinces, that Solemn Treaties of Peace were set on foot at Carlowitz in Sirmium upon the Confines of both Em∣pires, and there brought to a Conclusion; There Meeting at the said place, on the part of his Sacred Caesarean and Impe∣rial Majesty of the Romans, as his Ple∣nipotentiaries, the most Illustrious and most Excellent Lords, Wolfang, Count d'Ottingen, of the Sacred Roman Empire, Chamberlain of his Sacred Caesarean Ma∣jesty, and Privy-Counsellor and President of the Imperial Aulic Council; and the Lord Leopold Schlik, Count in Passaun and Weiskirchen, of the Sacred Roman Empire, Chamberlain of his said Caesa∣rean Majesty, Captain General of the Guards, and Colonel of the Regiment of Desvetorii: Both these, at these Treaties of Peace, with the Ottoman Port, De∣puted Ambassadors Extraordinary and Plenipotentiaries; But on the part of his Imperial Ottomannick Majesty, the most Illustrious and most Excellent Lords, Mehemet Effendi, Supreme Chancellor of the Ottoman Empire, and the Lord Alex∣ander Mauro Cordato, of the Noble Fa∣mily of Scarlati, Privy Counsellor and Secretary of the said Empire; By the Intervention and Care of the most Illu∣strious and most Excellent Lords, the Lord William Paget, Baron Beaudesert, and the Lord Jacob Colyer, Ambassadors from the most Serene King of Great Britain, and the High and Mighty States General, to the Ottoman Port, and

both of 'em Ambassadors Extraordinary for the Establishment of this Peace, and both of 'em perform'd the Office of Mediator with Integrity, Industry and Prudence, after having Invok'd the Name of GOD, and Exchanged the Powers, receiv'd the Twenty following Articles of Peace, which were Agreed upon to the Glory of GOD, and the Safety of both Empires.

I.

THE Region of Transylvania, as it is at present in the Possession, and in the Power of his Caesarean Majesty, so it shall remain under his Dominion, Bounded by the Confines of Podolia, and with the Mountains on the side of Walachia, which were its Antient Limits before the present War, between Transylvania on one part, and Moldavia and Walachia on the other; and on the side of Walachia, it is to extend to the River Merisch, to be Circumscrib'd by the Mountains, that were its Antient Boundaries, and so the Antient Limits are to be observ'd by both Empires, without extending or diminishing them on either side.

II.

The Province subject to the Fortress of Temeswaer, with all its Districts and Ri∣vers, shall remain in the Possession and un∣der the Power of the Sublime Ottoman Empire; and it shall remain Bounded by Transylvania on one side, and by Walachia on the other, to the River Merisch, the Antient Boundaries of Transylvania, men∣tion'd in the former Article: Then from the River Merisch to the nearer Banks of the Tibisch; and from the Tibisch to the Danube, to be Limited by the hither Banks of the Tibisch; and as for Caran∣sebes, Lugos, Lippa, Csanad, Kiscanisia, Betche, Betskerecke, and Sablia, which are comprehended within these prescrib'd Li∣mits between the Merisch and the Tibisch, and were before the present War belonging to the Territories of Temeswaer, both these and any other place of the like Nature, shall be slighted by the Imperialists, so that by Virtue of this present Treaty they may not be Rebuilt, and this foresaid Region of Te∣meswaer is to be left Free and Entire; so that for the time to come, neither in these Places, nor on the Banks of Merisch or Ti∣bisch, shall it be lawful to Build any Places that shall carry the Appearance of Fortifica∣tions.

The use of the Rivers Tibisch and Me∣risch between the Province of Temeswaer, and those subject to the Imperialists, shall be left Free and Common to those Subjects of both Empires, as well in relation to the Watering of their Cattle, as to the Fish∣ing, and any other Conveniencies to both Subjects.

Ships of any Burden, coming from Parts subject to the Imperialists, whether it be from the Merisch into the Tibisch, and from the Tibisch into the Danube, are by no means to be hindred or stop'd, whether they are going up or down the Streams; so that the Naviation of German Ships, or other Subjects of the Empire, are neither going nor coming to be Incommoded, but their Passage, both going and coming, is to be Free in both the said Rivers; And be∣cause the common Convenience of mutual Friendship and Kindness requires, that the Ottoman Subjects should likewise partake of the Benefits of these Rivers, therefore they may freely make use of Fishermens Ships, or other Boats.

But Mills built on Bottoms of Ships can be only planted there, where they do not Obstruct the Navigation of the Imperialists, and that to be done by Communicating with, and Consent of the Governours on both sides; and the Intent of this is, That the Navi∣gation of the Merisch be not rendred worse to the Imperialists, whether it be by lessen∣ing the Stream for the sake of Mills, or any other pretence whatsoever.

The Islands in both the said Rivers, that are in the possession of the Imperialists, are to remain so; and that the Subjects on both sides may live Quietly and Peaceably, is to be provided by severe Edicts, forbidding all sort of Insolencies and Contraventions to the present Articles.

III.

Considering the Region commonly call'd Batska, betwixt the Tibisch and the Da∣nube, is in the sole Possession, and under the Power of his Imperial Majesty, it is agreed, it shall for the future continue so, and Titul is not to be more Fortify'd than it is at present.

IV.

A right Line to be drawn from the Ex∣treme Bank of the Tibisch opposite to that of Titul, and to that Angle of Land made by the Conjunction of the Tibisch and Da∣nube to the Bank on the other side the Da∣nube, and thence to be stretch'd streight to Moravitz on the hither Bank of the River Bossut, and from thence to the place where the Grand Stream of the River Bossut falls into the Save, and Moravitz is to remain

without any Fortification, and only open Vil∣lages to be built on both sides the River, and the Empires shall remain separated by the foresaid Line, to be mark'd out either by Ditches, Stones, or Pales, or any other way, after the following manner, viz. That part of the Country within the foresaid Limits to∣wards Belgrade, shall remain Subject to the Ottoman Emperor; but the Country on the other side the said Line shall continue under the Dominion and in the Possession of the most Potent Roman Emperor, and accoridng to the foresaid Boundaries, the adjacent Rivers are to remain in the Possession of each Party.

V.

Reckoning from the River Bossut flowing into the Save, and likewise the Entrance of the River Unna into the same River, that part of the Save adjoyning to the Imperial Country, is to remain to his Imperial Ma∣jesty, and the other part to the Turkish Em∣peror.

The River Save, flowing betwixt both Dominions, and the Islands situated in it, shall be common to the Subjects of both Em∣pires, as well for the Use of Navigation up and down the River, as any other sort of Conveniencies, who are to enjoy a peaceable and undisturb'd Commerce: That Country on the side the River Unna towards Bosnia, belonging to the Turkish Empire, shall be terminated by the Banks of that River No∣vi, Dubizza, Jessenovitza, Doboy, and Brod, on the side of Bosnia, are to be E∣vacuated, and ev'ry other such like place in this Tract of Land, and the Imperial Garri∣sons to be all withdrawn, and the Country to be left Free: But Castanovitz, and the Islands on this side Novi, towards the Save, and the further Banks, shall be left distinct from these Limits, considering it is Agreed, they should remain in the Possession of the Roman Emperor.

As to the Places beyond the Unna, of great distance from the Save, which are Garrison'd and Possess'd some of 'em by one Party to this Treaty, and some by the other, with the Lands that were Appendages, and belonging to the said Places before the pre∣sent War, it is Agreed, They should remain to the Possessor, with this Condition, That Commissaries on both sides suddenly to be appointed shall separate each District or Ter∣ritory by particular Lines to be distinguish'd by Ditches, Stones, Posts, or any other evi∣dent Marks to avoid Confusion; particularly the Confines of Croatia are thus to be distin∣guish'd, and the Bounds of all other Places now in the Possession and under the Power of each Party to this Treaty.

And on both sides, it is Agreed, That if any one dare presume to alter, change, re∣move, pull up, destroy, or violate any thing that is thus set for distinguishing Land-Marks, he if found out, or convicted by any manner of Enquiry, shall for an Example to others, be most severely punished.

It shall likewise be an Instruction to the Commissaries to be as soon as possible Deputed on each side by the Sovereign Authority, that as the end of their Deputation is the fixing the Limits and Boundaries of each Empire, so their principal Intention shall be the Se∣curity and Quiet of the Subjects of both Em∣pires, and this to be so manag'd, that with∣out Personal Heats on either side, or with∣out any particular Regards, they plainly di∣stinguish the Limits of each Empire.

The Fortifications of Brod on the other side the Save, (lately made by the Imperia∣lists) at the time the Place is Evacuated by the Garrison, it is Agreed, should be Slighted, yet considering that Place is very convenient for a Staple for Merchants, it shall be law∣ful to Enclose that Place with convenient Walls, but still not such as shall arise to the Nature of a Fortification.

VI.

The Limits thus fix'd by this Treaty, and afterwards, as Occasions require, to be more distinctly settled by the personal view of Com∣missaries on both sides, shall for times to come be with so much Exactness and Religion ob∣serv'd, that they shall not be extended, al∣ter'd, transferr'd, or chang'd upon what pre∣tence soever.

Nor shall any of these Parties, the Limits thus set forth and establish'd, pretend to Exercise any sort of Jurisdiction beyond the Lines and Bounds thus describ'd, whether it be upon pretence of Collecting of Tribute or Contributions for times past, or for the pre∣sent, or for times to come, or upon pretence that these Subjects deliver'd themselves over to the other side, or upon any other Colour or Account whatsoever, be permitted, allow'd, or conniv'd at to make Collections out of each others Districts, or in the least to molest each other, that all Occasion of Quarrel and Dispute may be for ever remov'd.

VII.

It shall be lawful for each Party, for the Security of their Confines on the Lands thus peaceably set out and possessed by this present Treaty, in the best manner they can, to re∣pair and strengthen all Castles, Fortifications, and other Places now in being, except it be those against which there are particular Pro∣visions made: But in the Extreme Confines of both Empires, it is Agreed, That open

Villages may be without any Lett or Hin∣drance, rais'd, yet so that there be not any Fortifications erected.

VIII.

All sudden or private Insults, all hostile Incursions or Devastations, or Executions from the Subjects of one Empire upon the other, are forbid upon the severest Penal∣ties; The Contraveners or Transgressors of this Article, wheresoever they are found, shall immediately be Imprison'd, and by the Justice of the Place where they are taken, shall be punish'd without Pardon or Reprieve; Diligent Search shall be made after what they have thus Rob'd or Unjustly Acquir'd; and when it is found, it shall be wholly re∣stor'd to its proper Owner. The Captains, Commanders, and Governors, in both the Empires, shall Administer equal Justice, un∣der the Penalty not only of their Office, but of their Life and Honour.

IX.

It shall not be Lawful for either of the Emperors to Receive or Comfort in his Do∣minions, the Rebels or Malecontents of the Others; But such Fugitives as these, as like∣wise all Robbers, Thieves, altho' they are the Subjects of the Other Empire, yet shall they be punish'd in the Country they are found in: If they lie Conceal'd, then all Endea∣vours may be us'd to discover 'em to the Go∣vernours of those Places, and they upon such Discovery are oblig'd to punish 'em; If these Governours be Remiss in Punishing of these wicked Men, then shall they incur the utmost Displeasure of their Emperor, and shall be put out of their Employment, or lose their own Lives. And that a Securer Restraint may be made to the Extravagancies of these Wretches, it is provided, That neither of the Parties shall Entertain or Nourish the Hay∣dones, whom they call Freebooters, and those Partymen nam'd from Pribecke, or any other sort of Men, who not being in the Pay of either Empire, live upon Robbery and Rapine, and both these and those that nourish and assist 'em, shall be punish'd ac∣cording to their Demerits; And so intole∣rable are such Wretches, that tho' they pro∣mise Amendment of their Customary Life, yet is not Credit in this case to be Indulg'd to 'em, but they are to be remov'd from the Confines to some more remote Parts of the Empires.

X.

In the time of the War, several of the Hungarians and Transilvanians withdrew themselves from the Subjection of his Cae∣sarean Majesty into the Confines of the Sub∣lime Port, and by the present Truce it is Agreed, these shall be Indemnify'd in the manner following, viz. They shall have con∣venient Habitations allotted them in the Ot∣toman Empire; But least the Peace and Tranquillity of the Bordering Subjects should be endanger'd to be disturb'd, the Places ap∣pointed for their Abode shall be remote from the Boundaries of the Empires: The Wives likewise of these shall be permitted to follow 'em, and to Cohabit with 'em in the Places thus assign'd. But considering these Men are always hereafter to be taken as Subjects of the Ottoman Empire, it shall never here∣after be Lawful for 'em to Forsake or Re∣nounce to that Subjection; And in case they pretend to Recede from it, and to return into their Native Country, they shall be deem'd Rebels or Malecontents, nor shall they receive Entertainment or Succour from the Imperi∣alists, but being taken they shall be deliver'd to the Ottoman Governours on the Borders, that by this means the present Peace may on both sides be better secur'd.

XI.

In Order to remove all Differences, Contro∣versies, or Discords, which might arise concern∣ing the Interpretation of any of these Articles or any other matter during this Truce, it is Agreed, That where there shall be occasion for a ready and effectual Remedy, an equal number of Commissaries shall on both sides be immediately chose on the Confines: These shall be Sober, Prudent, Experienc'd, and Peaceable Men, who without Troops meeting with an unarm'd Retinue of equal number on both sides, shall hear, consider, decide, and amicably Agree all such Controversies as can arise, and shall propound and appoint such Order and Methods, by which either Party shall without delay or fraud, reduce or com∣pel their Servants and Subjects to a sincere Observance of this Peace; But if Matters of such great Moment should arise, that such Commissaries are not able to Agree or Deter∣mine 'em, then shall Affairs be refer'd to the two most Potent Emperors themselves, that they themselves may find out and apply so proper Means or Expedients for the setling such Differences, that they may in as short a time as possible be finally determin'd, nor shall such Resolutions be neglected or long Protracted.

Whereas in the Sacred Articles of former Treaties between the two Empires, Duels, and all sort of Challenges in order to 'em, have been forbid; it is now likewise Agreed, that in like manner for the time to come they shall remain unlawful, and if any dare

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

presume to enter into single Combates, they shall be proceeded against with the utmost rigour.

XII.

The Captives, that during this present War have on each side been carry'd away, and are at present remaining in the publick Prisons, considering from this happy Peace, they may reasonably expect Release, nor can they be retain'd in this Misery without In∣dignity to the Imperial Majesty, and Offence of laudable Custom, shall be restor'd by way of Exchange upon the usual or more easie Con∣ditions; and in case there are more on one side than on the other, or some of greater Quality on one side than on the other; yet the Solemn Demands of the Ambassador on each side shall so far prevail upon the Clemency of each Emperor, that these Supernumeraries shall with the rest find a Release: But as for the Prisoners that are in private Hands, or amongst the Tartars, they shall be Redeem'd upon Equitable and as moderate Terms as possible: But if such fair Agreement cannot be made with the Patrons of these Slaves, the particular Judges of the Places where they live shall settle this Matter of what is to be pay'd for their Redemption; but if those ways should fail, then the Captives them∣selves making it appear by Testimonies or Oaths, what their Masters pay'd for 'em, up∣on the Repayment of that Money shall be Re∣leas'd; Nor shall it be permitted to their Masters to oppose themselves to this Release upon the pretence of a greater Price; and considering that on the part of the Ottoman Empire there may be no particular Society of Men employ'd to look after this Redemption of Captives; yet it is Agreed, That the Caesa∣rean Magistrates stand in Honour oblig'd to see the Turkish Slaves Releas'd upon the Pay∣ment of what they cost their Masters, so that this work may be carry'd on with equal Since∣rity on both sides: And that such Captives may at length gain their Liberty, the Am∣bassadors of each Empire shall in the mean time use all good Offices, that they may in the mean time be treated with Mildness and Hu∣manity.

XIII.

As concerning the Religious Orders, or Exercise of the Christian Religion, according to the Rites of the Roman Catholick Church, it is Agreed, by the most Serene and most Potent Ottoman Emperor, That whatsoever Indulgences have been made by the precedent most Glorious Ottoman Emperors in their Do∣minions, whether it were by Antecedent Sacred Capitulations, by Imperial Signets, by Edicts or Special Mandates, that all these shall stand good and confirm'd; so that the fore∣said Religious may repair and rebuild their Churches, may Exercise their usual and ac∣custom'd Functions; so that it shall not be lawful from any one, contrary to these Sacred Capitulations and Divine Laws, to impose upon 'em any sort of trouble or pecuniary Ex∣action, let these Religious be of what Order or Condition soever, they shall enjoy the usual Protection and Goodness of the Impe∣rial Ottoman Empire.

Besides, it shall be allow'd to the Ambas∣sador of the most Serene and most Potent Roman Emperor to the Fulgid Port, to en∣ter into Treaty there according to his Instru∣ctions about the Religion and Places of Chri∣stian Pilgrimage or Visitation in the Holy City of Jerusalem, and he shall there lay be∣fore the Imperial Throne his Demands about these Matters.

XIV.

The Commerce according to the former Sa∣cred Capitulations, shall be free to the Sub∣jects on both sides, through all the Kingdoms and Dominions of both Empires, but this in∣tercourse of mutual. Trade may be perform'd without Fraud, and with just Profit, at the times of the Solemn Embassies on both sides, there shall be appointed Commissioners well vers'd in Mercantile Affairs, who shall De∣bate this Matter; and the same Privileges the High Empire allows to other Nations in Friendship with it, shall with the same Secu∣rity and Advantages to the Subjects of his Caesarean Majesty of what Nation soever they may be.

XV.

Whatsoever Conditions are express'd in the Antient Sacred Capitulations, shall stand good and be religiously Observ'd, provided they do not contradict the Articles of this present Treaty, or are no ways prejudicial or obstru∣ctive to that free Exercise of Power, which each Empire is intended to have in its own Dominions; and in case any former Articles come under this Discription, then they are declar'd by these Presents null and void.

XVI.

And that this present Truce may the bet∣ter grow and be confirm'd into a mutual Friendship and Confidence betwixt the two most potent Emperors, Extraordinary Ambas∣sadors shall be sent on both sides, who are to be Receiv'd, Treated, and Attended from their Entrance into the Confines, and during their stay, and to the time of their Return

till they are again Exchang'd with the usual Ceremonies, and for a more manifest Decla∣ration of the Friendship between the two Em∣perors, these Ambassadors shall bring and make voluntary Presents, yet such as shall correspond to, and be agreeable to the High Dignity of each Emperor. And the said Ambassadors, by Concert in June in the en∣suing Summer, at the same time beginning their Journey, shall be Exchang'd in the Confines of Sirmium, after the manner that has been us'd upon such Occasions.

And it shall be permitted to each of the Ambassadors at the Imperial Courts, to make what Requests they shall think convenient.

XVII.

The Rule for Receiving, Entertaining, or Treating the Ministers by the Courtiers of each Empire, shall be taken from the practice of former times, to be executed with all imaginable Candor and Decency, according to that distinct Prerogative which the Characters of those that are sent shall Demand. The Caesarean Ambassadors, Envoys, or Resi∣dents, and their Attendants, shall without the hindrance of any one, enjoy a full liberty of using what sort of Garments they please. Besides, the Caesarean Minister, whether he be Vested with the Character of Ambassador, Envoy, Resident, or Agent, shall at the Ful∣gid Port enjoy the same Privileges and Im∣munities, which the Ambassadors or Agents of any other Princes there enjoy, and to make a Distinction of the Prerogative of the Caesarean Dignity, with the usual Marks of Preference: They shall have liberty of Hi∣ring their own Interpreters, and their Messen∣gers that come to the Fulgid Port, or return from it to Vienna, shall have free Passage going and coming, with all convenient Fa∣vour and Assistance in their Journey.

XVIII.

This Peace tho' it now stands concluded upon the present Conditions, yet it shall then only be esteem'd to have and to receive its full force of Obligation and Effect, when all and singular Conditions, stipulated and ac∣cepted on both sides, as well concerning the Distinctions of the Borders, as the Evacua∣tions and Demolishments shall be fully exe∣cuted in this manner, after the Limits are settled, then shall the Evacuations and De∣molishments of Places follow, and that all this may as soon as possible be put in practice, Commissaries to settle these Distinctions, shall on both sides be appointed, who at the Equi∣noctial, S.N. 22. S.V. 12 of March, A.D. 1699. shall with a moderate and peaceable Attendance, meet at Places to be determin'd by the Governors of the Confines, and these Commissaries shall within two months or less, if possible, by manifest marks describ'd in the former Articles separate and set apart these Confines, and shall with all exactness and expedition, execute all other things that shall be Agreed by the Plenipo∣tentiaries of both Empires.

XIX.

The Plenipotentiaries of both Empires do mutually Oblige themselves, and Promise, that these Conditions and Articles thus re∣duc'd into Form, shall be mutually Ratify'd by the Majesty of each of the Emperors, and that within 30 days or sooner from the time of Subscription, the Ratifications shall in Solemn manner be mutually Exchang'd in the Confines by the most Illustrious and most Ex∣cellent Lords the Plenipotentiary Mediators.

XX.

This Truce shall continue, and God willing, extend to full 25 years, to be reckon'd from the day of the Subscription, after the Expi∣ration of which Term; or in the middle of it, it shall be in the Power of either of the Parties; that so shall think fit, to prolong it to a greater number of Years.

Therefore what things soever are here esta∣blish'd by the mutual and free Consent of the Majesty of the most Serene and most Potent Emperor of the Romans on the one part, and the Majesty of the most Serene and most Potent Ottoman Emperor on the other, and their Heirs, shall be Religiously and Inviolably observ'd thro' all their Empires and Kingdoms, by Land and Sea, through all their Cities and Towns, and by all their Subjects and Dependants; and it is likewise Agreed, that it shall on both sides be strictly enjoyn'd to all Governours, Commanders, Captains, Generals, to all the Soldiery, to all under their Protection, to all in Subjection and Obedience under them, that they take diligent Care to Conform themselves to all the above-mention'd Conditions, Clauses, Compacts and Articles, that under what pre∣tence or colour soever, contrary to the Peace and Friendship thus establish'd, the Subjects on either side do not offend or injure one ano∣ther; but abstaining from all sort of Enmity, they are commanded to become good Neigh∣bours to each other, under the severest Pe∣nalties, if after they are thus admonish'd, they do not yield a ready Obedience.

The Tartar Cham likewise, and all the Nations of the Tartars, by whatsoever Names they are call'd, stand engag'd to the Obser∣vance of this Peace, Good Neighbourhood, and Reconciliation; nor shall it be permitted 'em in prejudice of these Agreements to commit any Hostilities in the Provinces; or upon

any of the Subjects, or upon any under the Protection of his Caesarean Majesty. More∣over, if any one shall presume to Act contrary to these Sacred Imperial Capitulations, Agree∣ments or Articles, whether he belongs to the Tartar Nations, or to any other Forces by whatsoever Name call'd, he shall be most ri∣gorously punish'd.

This Peace, Cessation, and Security of the Subjects on both sides, shall commence from the Date of this Subscription, and thence all Enmities on both sides shall cease and be ex∣tinguish'd, and the Subjects on both sides shall enjoy full Security and Tranquillity, and for that end, and in order all Hostili∣ties may be carefully prevented, Mandates and Edicts for publishing the Peace shall as soon as possible be sent to all Governours of the Confines; but considering some time will be requisite, that the Officers in the remoter Confines may have notice of this Peace, 20 days are for this purpose appointed, after which, if any one on either side presume to commit any sort of Hostility, he shall with∣out Mercy, suffer the Punishments before de∣clar'd.

In the last place, that these Conditions of Peace, contain'd in 20 Articles, and accepted of on both sides, may with great and due respect be inviolably observ'd; The Lords the Ottoman Plenipotentiaries, by Virtue of an Imperial Faculty granted to 'em for that pur∣pose, have deliver'd to us an Authentick and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Instrument, writ and subscrib'd in the Turkish Language, are likewise by Virtue of a Special Order, and by our Ple∣nipotentiary Power have on our part deli∣ver'd these Writings of the Articles Sign'd and Subscrib'd by our proper Hands and Seals in the Latin Tongue, as a True and Authen∣tick Instrument.

This Treaty between the Emperor, be∣ing thus finished and agreed, the next thing was to appoint Commissaries to re∣gulate the Limits between Croatia, and Bosnia, as was concluded by the Treaty of Peace at Carlovitz, to appear upon the said Limits on the 14/24th of March follow∣ing, in order to which Affair his Imperial Majesty appointed Count Marsilii for his Commissary, giving him Orders to de∣part from Vienna in a Weeks time. But the Ratifications relating to the Articles of Peace concluded on both sides were sooner dispatched, for the Grand Seignior's Rati∣fication of the Treaty arrived at Belgrade, the 9th of March N.S. 1699. of which Advice was given the same day to the Secretary of the Imperial Embassy, who waited at Peter-Waradin with that of the Emperors, that the Exchange might be made on the same Day, the which was accordingly done.

[ 1699] COPIA INSTRUMENTI TURCICI CUM MOSCOVITA. Hic est Deus, maxime aperiens omnia, Potentissimus, Firmissimus. In Nomine Dei misericordis, semper miserentis.

CAusa exarationis hujus veritate praecellentis Scripti, & necessitas descriptionis hujus realitate in∣signiti Instrumenti haec est: In∣corruptibilis Domini Creatoris, & immor∣talis Opificis liberrimi arbitru, Domini Dei, cujus Gloria extollatur extra omnem similitudinem, & paritatem, aeternarum confirmationum ubertatis concessione, & gratiâ honoratissimae Meccae, & lucidissimae Medinae Servi, & Sanctae Hierusalem, & aliorum Locorum benedictorum Defen∣soris, & Rectoris, binarum Terratum Sul∣tani, & Regis binorum Marium, Domi∣natoris potentis Aegypti, & Abyssinarum Provinciarum, ac Felicis Arabiae, & Ade∣nensis Terrae, & Caesareae Africanae, & Tripolis, & Tuneti, & Insulae Cypri, & Rhodi, & Cretae, & aliarum Albi Maris Insularum, atque Imperatoris Babylonis, & Bositrae, & Laxae, & Revani, & Car∣siae, & Erzirum, & Schresul, & Mussul, & Diarbekir, & Ricae, & Damasci, & Aleppi, & Sultani Persicae & Arabicae Ira∣chiensis Regionis, & Regis Ghiurdistaniae, & Turchistaniae, & Giurzistaniae, & Dag∣histaniae, & Trapezuntis, & Imperatoris Provinciarum Rum, & Zul-chadriae, & Maras, Imperatoris Regionum Tartariae, Circassiae, & Abasiorum, atque Crimeae, ac Desti-Capzac, Imperatoris Orientis, & Occidentis, & Anatoliae, & Rumeliae, Pos∣sessoris Sedis Regiae Constantinopolis, & protectae Prussae, ac defensae Adrianopolis, & praeterea Imperatoris latissimarum tot Provinciarum, totque Climatum & Urbium ac celeberrimi Dominatoris, Sultani Sulta∣norum, Regis Regum, Serenissimi, Poten∣tissimi, Augustissimi Domini nostri Impe∣ratoris, Refugii Musulmannici; Sultani Filii Sultanorum, Sultani Mustafa Regis, Filii Sultani Mehmet Regis, cujus Imperi∣um Deus perenne faciat, ac Principatum stabiliat usque in diem judicii, Majestatis, Excelsum Imperium inter, & Gloriosissi∣mum inter eximies Principes Christianos, & Praelectissimum inter magnos Dominato∣res Christianos, Directorem magnorum ne∣gotiorum Christianarum Rerumpublicarum, Chlamyde Amplitudinis & Majestatis exor∣natissimum, Argumentis magnitudinis & gloriae condecoratissimum Czarum Mosco∣viticarum Regionum, & omnium Ruthe∣nicarum Provinciarum Dominatorem, & Possessorem subjectarum illis Terrarum, & Urbium, sublimem Czarum Moscoviae Pe∣trum Alexovicium (cujus fines Deus salute & rectitudine coronet) cùm intercedens aliquibus annis dissidium fuerit in causa ca∣lamitatis Subditorum, & Subjectorum u∣triusque partis, eâ intentione, ut iterum in amicitiam, & benevolentiam commute∣tur, ad bonam constitutionem rerum Civi∣tatensium, & ad reducendum in meliorem conditionem Statum Servorum Dei, in Sir∣mio in Confiniis Carlovicii facto Congressu, cum Illustrissimo, & Excellentissimo inter Christianos Magnates, Domino Procopio Begdanouiz Vosnizin, altè memorati Czari

Plenipotentiario Commissario, & Extraor∣dinario Legato, & intimo Consiliario, & Locumtenente Bolchiae, ab eodem Czaro ad Tractatus, & Conclusionem Pacis ne∣gotii perfectâ authoritate destinato, & de∣putato: atque explentibus, Mediationis manûs bonis officiis, ac diligenti operâ, deputatis à Gloriosissimis inter eximios Christianos Principes, & Re••••giis Magno∣rum Dominato••um ejusdem Gentis, An∣gliae, Scotiae, & Hiberniae Rege, Wilhel∣mo Tertio, & Generalibus Statibus Neder∣landensibus (quorum fines Deus salute & rectitudine coronet) ad exequendam Me∣diationis suae functionem ad Tractatus Pa∣cis, Illustrissimis & Excellentissimis inter Magnates Christianos, Wilhelmo Lord Pa∣gett, Barone de Beaudesert, &c. & Domi∣no Jacobo Colyer, etiamsi ab utraque parte adhibita sit ad Pacem, & Conciliati∣onem propensio, & inclinatio, cùm tamen non esset facile, brevi tempore, ut ablatis difficultatibus omnes res, convenientes Amicitiae, & Vicinitati, perfectè, & de∣bitè ad bonum ordinem redigerentur, ne interrumperetur continuatio istorum almo∣rum Tractatuum, sed ut pertractentur, & ad finem perducantur, hâc utrinque inten∣tione per mutuum consensum à Die vige∣simo quinto Decembris, Anni millesimi, centesimi, decimi, nempè Natalitio Domi∣ni Jesu Christi, usque ad integros duos annos terminus constitutus est, intra quem scilicet almus iste Tractatus ad bonum or∣dinem reducatur, & inter Excelsum Impe∣rium, & Moscoviticum Czareatum, fa∣vente Deo Altissimo, Pax, sive per indu∣cias, sive perpetua coalescat, & vetus ami∣citia renovetur. Itaque intra statutum un∣animi consensu terminum cesset omne prae∣lium, & bellum, & pugna, atque confli∣ctus, & utrinque amoveantur, & tollan∣tur hostilitates, Moscorum Czaro subjectis à Moscovitis & Cosaccis, & aliis in sub∣jecta Excelso Imperio Musulmannica Con∣finia, sive alia, sive Crimensia & Loca, & Subditos, nulla fiat excursio, & hostilitas nullumque damnum inferatur, neque clam, neque palam. Pariterque à parte Excelsi Imperii nullius conditionis Exercitus, prae∣sertim Crim••nsis Chanus, & omnia genera Tartarorum & Hordae, nullam penitus ex∣cursionem faciant, nullumque damnum in∣ferant, neque clam, neque palam, in Ci∣vitates, & Oppida, & Subditos & Sub∣jectos Nostro Czaro. Atque si qui sive clam, sive palam, motum aliquem, sive dispositionem, & hostilitatem, & incursio∣nem fecerint contra hoc Pactum, & hanc conditionem, quae inter nos confecta est, & sese contumaces, & minùs obedientes reddiderint, ex quacunque parte sint, de∣prehendantur, incarcerentur, & sine remis∣sione puniantur. Proinde praefatâ ratione colendi, & observandi hujus Armistitii tempore, conflictatio & hostilitas penitùs amoveantur atque tollantur, & ab utraque parte perfecta propensio, & plena inclina∣tio adhibeatur ad conclusionem Pacis; & Crimensis Chanus propter suam obedien∣tiam, & subjectionem ad Excelsum Impe∣rium, adjungatur huic Paci. Utque ab utraque parte acceptatum, & observatum sit, & altè memorati Czari Plenipotentia∣rius Legatus & Commissarius vigore suae Facultatis, & Auctoritatis Moscovitico Sermone descriptum, legitimum, & vali∣dum Instrumentum tradiderit: Nos quo∣que Facultatis & Vicariae nostrae Deputati∣onis vigore, nostris Manibus subscriptum, & nostris Sigillis firmatum hoc Scriptum, tamquam validum & legitimum Instrumen∣tum tradidimus.

Deus favens est aequitati.

[ 1699] COPIA INSTRUMENTI MOSCOVITAE CUM TURCIS.

IN Nomine Domini Dei Omnipotentis in Trinitate Sancta unius; Ejusdem Gratiâ Sereniss••mum, & Potentissi∣mum Magnum Dominum Czarum, & Magnum Ducem Petrum Alexovicium, totius magnae, & parvae, & albae Russiae Autocratorem, Moscoviae, Kioviae, Wolo∣dimiriae, Novogardiae, Czarum Caraniae, Czarum Astrachani, Czarum Siberiae, Do∣minum Plescoviae, & magnum Ducem Smo∣lensci, Treriae, Ingoriae, Permiae, Viatkae, Bolgariae, & aliorum Dominum, & mag∣num Ducem Novogardiae, inferioris Terrae, Csernihoviae, Resaniae, Rostoviae, Jaros∣claviae, Belovroriae, Valoriae, Obdoriae, Condiniae, & totius Plagae Septentrionalis Imperatorem, & Dominum Iveriensis Ter∣rae, Cartalinensium & Gruzinensium Cza∣rum, & Kabardiensis Terrae, Csercassorum, & Montanorum Ducem, ac aliorum mul∣torum Dominiorum, & Terrarum Orien∣talium, Occidentalium, Septentrionalium∣que Paternum Avitumque Haeredem, Suc∣cessorem, & Dominum, ac Dominatorem, suam inter Majestatem, atque inter Sere∣nissimum, & Potentissimum Magnum Do∣minum Sultanum Mustafam, Chanum, Filium Sultani Mehmet Chani, Dominum Constantinopoleos, Albi Maris, Nigri Maris, Anatoliae, Vrumiae, Romaniae, honoratissimae Meccae, & Medinae Sanctae, Hierusalem, Aegypti, & Abyssinarum, Ba∣bylonis, & Ricae, & Damasci Dominato∣rem, Tartaricarum & Crimensium Horda∣rum, nec non aliorum multorum Dominio∣rum, Regnorum, & Urbium, Insularum, & Provinciarum Imperatorem, ab aliquot annis intercedens dissidium causa fuit cala∣mitatis Subditorum, & Subjectorum utri∣que parti, ex intentione, ut rursus in Ami∣citiam, & Benevolentiam, ad bonam rerum Civilium constitutionem, reducendumque in meliorem conditionem statum transmu∣tetur, in Sirmio ad Confinia Carlovizii facto Congressu cum Illustrissimis & Ex∣cellentissimis, Selectissimo Domino Magno Cancellario Reis Mehmet Effendi, & cum Selectissimo Domino ab Intimis Secretis Alexandro ex Prosapia Scarlati Mauro Cordato, altè memoratae suae Sultanicae Majestatis Plenipotentiariis Commissariis, & Extraordinariis Legatis ad Tractatum, & Constitutionem Negotii Pacis perfectâ Au∣thoritate destinatis ac deputatis, Mediati∣onem inter Serenissimi & Potentissimi suae Regiae Majestatis Magnae Britanniae, & Praepotentum Generalium Statuum Neder∣landensium Hollandiorum, Illustrissimorum, & Excellentissimorum Plenipotentiariorum Eorundem Extraordinariorum Legatorum, Domini Wilhelmi Lord Pagett, Baronis de Beaudesert, &c. & Domini Jacobi Colyer, &c. ab utraque autem parte ad Pacem, & Inducias propensio, & inclinatio adhibita fuit; attamen non facile fuit, intra breve tempus, sublatis difficultatibus res univer∣sas, convenientes amicitiae, & vicinitati, perfectè, & debitè in bonum ordinem re∣digere; sed ne interrumperetur continua∣tio horum almorum Tractatuum, quinimo deinceps perficiatur, & ad finem deducatur, hac intentione utrinque per mutuum con∣sensum, id est, à Die 25 Decembris anno 1698. à Nativitate Domini Dei Jesu Chri∣sti, in futuros duos integros annos, inter altè fatos ambos Magnos Dominos fiant Induciae, in quibus almus hicce Tractatus in bonum ordinem reducatur, atque inter suam Czaream Majestatem Moscoviticam, & Sultanicam Majestatem Turcicam, Deo

Altissimo secundante, Pax perpetua, aut in sufficientes annos Induciae concludantur, & vetus Amicitia restauretur. Proinde in hoc constituto determinato unanimi con∣sensu desinat omne praelium, bellum, pugna, & conflictus, & utrobique amove∣antur, & tollantur hostilitates, & à Subdi∣tis suae Czareae Majestatis, Moscovitis, & Cosaccis, ac aliis, Confiniis Musulman∣nicis, & Crimensibus, atque reliquis suae Sultanicae Majestati subjectis Terris, & Subditis, nulla incursio & hostilitas fiat, neque clam, neque palam ullum damnum inferatur. Pariter ex parte suae Majesta∣tis Sultanicae adversus partem suae Czareae Majestatis nullius ordinis Exercitus, po∣tissimùm verò Crimensis Chanus, & omne genus Tartarorum, & Hordarum penitùs ullas incursiones faciant, nec ullum dam∣num palam aut clam in Civitatibus, & Oppidis, & subditis Territoriis suae Czareae Majestati perpetrent. Et si qui clam vel apertè motum aliquem, & dispositionem, hostilitatem, ac incursionem contra hanc constitutionem, & conditionem, quae nos inter confecta est, fecerint, & ex quacun∣que demùm parte tales contumaces repe∣riantur, apprehendantur, incarcerentur, & sine remissione indefensè puniantur. Hâc itaque praefatâ ratione, tempore colendi, & observandi hujus Armistitii, conflictatio, & hostilitas absolutè amoveatur, & tolla∣tur, ac ab utraque parte ad concludendam Pacem perfecta propensio, & plena incli∣natio adhibeatur, & Crimensis Chanus ex munere suae erga Imperialem suam Maje∣statem Turcicam obedientiae, & subjectio∣nis, huic Paci adjungatur; Quae omnia ut ab utraque parte acceptentur, & observen∣tur, quoniam altè memoratae suae Sultani∣cae Majestatis Plenipotentiarii Legati, & Commissarii, vigore suae facultatis, & Au∣thoritatis Turcico Sermone scriptum legiti∣mum, & firmum Instrumentum, ex eoque Latino Sermone propriis manibus, & Sigillis firmatam Copiam dederunt, pariter & ego facultatis, & Plenipotentiae mihi datae vigo∣re, manu propriâ subscriptum, & Sigillo fir∣matum hoc Scriptum Ruthenico & Latino Sermone copiatum, tanquam firmum, & le∣gitimum Instrumentum tradidi. Scriptum in Carlowiz, Ann. 1698. Mense Decem. Die 25.

[ 1699] A COPY OF THE Turkish Treaty WITH THE MUSCOVITE, It is God the most Powerful, the most Just, who brings all Things to pass. In the Name of God the Merciful, always Compassionate.

THE Reason of the making this Writing Refulgent in Truth, and the necessity of the Description of this Instrument stamp'd with Rea∣lity, is this; The War betwixt the Sublime Empire of Mustapha, by the Concessions of the Plenitude of the Eternal Confirmations of the Incorruptible Lord Creator, and the Immortal Maker of most Freewill, the Lord God, whose Glory be extoll'd beyond Simili∣tude or Equality, and by the Grace of the most Honour'd Mecca, and the Servant of the most Illustrious Medina, Defender and Rector of the Holy Jerusalem, and other Blessed Places, Sultan of the two Earths, and King of the two Seas, Lord of Potent Egypt, and the Abyssine Provinces, and Arabia the Happy, and the Land of Adenum and Cae∣sarean Africk, and Tripoly and Tunis, and the Island of Cyprus and Rhodes, and Crete, and other Islands of the White Sea, and Emperor of Babylon, and Bosnia, and Laxa, and Revanum, and Carsia, and Er∣zirum, and Sehresul, and Mussul, and Di∣arbekir, and Rica, and Damascus, and A∣leppo, and Sultan of the Persic and Arabic Irachian Region, and King of Ghiurdistania and Turchistania, and Daghistania, and Trapezuntum, and Emperor of the Pro∣vinces of Rum, and Zulchadria, and Ma∣ras, Emperor of the Regions of Tartary, of Circassia, and the Abastans, and the Crimea and Desti-Capzac, Emperor of the East and West, and Anatolia and Rumelia, Possessor of the Royal-Seat of Constantinople, and Protected Prussia, and Defended Adriano∣ple, and besides of so many the most large Provinces, and of so many Climates and Ci∣ties, and most Celebrated Governour, Sultan of Sultans, King of Kings, most Serene, most Potent, most August Lord our Emperor, the Refuge of Musulmen, Sultan Son of Sultans, Son of Sultan King Mehmet, (whose Empire God perpetuate, and establish his Government to the Day of Judgment;) And the most glorious amongst the principal Christians, Di∣rector of the great Affairs of the Christian Commonwealths, Adorn'd with the Robes of Greatness and Majesty, Conspicuous with the Power of Greatness and Glory, the Czar of the Muscovite Regions, and Lord of all the Ruthenic Provinces and Possessor of the Lands and Cities Subject to them, the Sub∣lime Czar of Mus••ovy, Peter Alexovic, (whose End let God crown with Salvation and Righteousness,) considering this War for some Years has been the Occasion of Calamity to the Subjects on both sides, with an Intent, that it might be chang'd into Friendship and Kindness, that Affairs might be put into bet∣ter

Order, and the State of the Servants of God might be reduc'd into a better Condition, in the Congress of Sirmium in the Confines of Carlovitz, upon Treaty with the most Illustrious and most Excellent amongst the Christian Grandees, Lord Procopius Begda∣noviz Vosniziri, Plenipotentiary Commissio∣nated by the Czar, and Ambassador Extra∣ordinary, and Privy-Counsellor, and Lieute∣nant of Bolchia, Design'd and Deputed by the said Czar with full Powers to Treat and Conclude a Peace, and the most Illustrious and most Excellent amongst the Christian Grandees, William Lord Pagett, Baron of Beaudesert, &c. and Lord Jacob Colyer, performing the part of Mediators, with great good Offices and Diligence, Deputed so to do by the most Glorious amongst the most Illustri∣ous Christian Princes, and the Resort of the Rulers of the Nations, William III. of Eng∣land, Scotland, and Ireland, King, and the States General, (whose Ends God crown with Salvation and Righteousness,) altho' both Par∣ties show'd a Propensity and Inclination to Peace and Reconciliation; but considering in so short a time it was not easie to remove all Difficulties, and to settle all things Agreea∣ble to Friendship and good Neighbourhood; Therefore, least the Continuance of these good Treaties should be interrupted, but that they should proceed and be brought to an End, with this Intent on both sides, by mutual Consent, the Term of Two Years is Agreed on to begin from the 25th of December, Christmas-day, A. Heg. 1110. within which time this good Treaty may be reduced in∣to Order, and by the Grace of the most High God, a Peace or Truce may be concluded betwixt the Sublime Empire, and the Mus∣covitish Czareate, by which perpetual and ancient Friendship may be Renew'd. There∣fore within the Term thus prefix'd, by una∣nimous Consent, all War, Battles, and Skir∣mishes shall cease, and all Hostilities shall be remov'd and forbid to the Subjects of the Czar of Muscovy, both Muscovites and Cossacks, and all others, there shall be no Excursion, Hostility, Damage, whether pri∣vately or publickly done or committed, upon the Musulman Confines, subject to the Sub∣lime Empire, whether in the Crimea, or any other Places, or upon the Subjects of this Em∣pire: In like manner on the part of the High Empire, no Army of what Condition soever, especially belonging to the Crimean Cham, and all sorts of Tartars, or Hords, shall make any sort of Excursion, nor commit Damage privately or publickly, upon the Ci∣ties and Towns, and Subjects or Dependants upon the Czar: And if contrary to this Compact and Agreement, which is made be∣twixt us, any, either privately or publickly, shall raise any Commotion, or make Prepara∣tion for it, or shall commit Hostility, or make Incursion, or shall be Obstinate, or not Obedient, let 'em be of what side they will, they shall be Apprehended, Imprison'd, and Punish'd without Mercy; Therefore after this method shall this Truce be cultivated and observ'd during the time of it, all Conflicts and Hostilities shall be remov'd and extin∣guish'd, and both Parties with full Inclination shall apply themselves to the Conclusion of a Peace, and the Crimean Cham shall be in∣cluded in this Place, by reason of the Obe∣dience and Subjection he owes to the Sublime Empire: That it may be receiv'd and observ'd on both sides, the Plenipotentiary Ambassa∣dor and Commissary of the highly foremention'd Czar, by Virtue of his Powers and Authority, has deliver'd an Authentick Instrument in due Form, written in the Muscovite Lan∣guage: We likewise by Virtue of our Powers and Deputation, have deliver'd this Authen∣tick Instrument in due Form, Subscrib'd with our Hands and Seal'd with our Seals.

God is favourable to Justice.

[ 1699] A COPY OF THE Muscovite Treaty WITH THE TURKS.

IN the Name of the Omnipotent Lord God, One in Holy Trinity: By whose Grace the most Serene and Potent Lord Czar, and Great Duke, Peter Alexo∣vic, Emperor of the Whole Great and Little Russia, of Muscovy, Kiovia, Wolodimi∣ria, Novogardia, Czar of Carania, Czar of Astrachan, Czar of Siberia, Lord of Ples∣covia, Great Duke of Smolenscum, Lord of Treria, Ingoria, Permia, Viatka, Bolga∣ria, and of other Dominions; Great Duke of Novogardia, of the Lower Country, of Csernihovia, Resania, Rostovia, Jaroscla∣via, Belovroria, Valoria, Obdoria, Con∣dinia, and Emperor of all the Northern Coun∣try, and Lord of the Land af Iveria, Czar of the Cartalinensians and Grunizensians, and Duke of Karbardia, of the Csercassians and Mountaneers, and many other Domini∣ons and Lands to the East, West and North, from Father and Ancestors, Heir, Successor, Lord and Commander, between his Majesty and the most Mighty Great Lord Sultan Mustapha Han, Son of Sultan Mehmet Han, Lord of Constantinople, of the White Sea, the Black Sea, of Anatolia, Rumia, Ro∣mania, of the most Honour'd Mecca and Medina, and Holy Jerusalem, of Egypt, of the Abyssines, of Babylon and Rica, and Commander of Damascus, Emperor of the Tartarian and Crimean Hords, as also of many other Dominions, Kingdoms and Cities, Islands and Provinces.

Whereas the War for many years has been the Cause of the Misery of the Subjects, and Dependants on both Parties, that Friendship and Kindness might be restor'd, and by that means the Civil Affairs might become bet∣ter settled, and all things chang'd into a more flourishing Condition; with this intent a Congress was had in Sirmium on the Con∣fines of Carlovitz, with the most Illustrious and most Excellent the most Select Lord Great Chancellor Reis Mehmet Effendi, and the most Select Lord of the Privy Council, Mauro Cordato, of the Family of Scarlati, Plenipotentiary Commissioners, and Ambassa∣dors Extraordinary of the highly mention'd Sultan Majesty, Deputed with full Powers to Treat of and Settle the Business of a Peace, through the Mediation of his most Serene and most Royal Majesty of Great Bri∣tain, and of the States General of the Ne∣therlands, by their most Excellent Plenipo∣tentiaries, Ambassadors Extraordinary, the Lord William Lord Pagett, Baron de Beau∣desert, &c. and Lord Jacob Colyer, &c. both sides show'd an Inclination to a Peace and Truce, but in so short a time it was not easie to remove all Difficulties, and put all things into an Order agreeable to Friendship and Good Neighbourhood; yet least the Con∣tinuance of these Treaties should be Inter∣rupted, and that they might be perfected and brought to an end, with this Intent, by mu∣tual Consent on both sides, a Truce, betwixt the two great highly mention'd Lords, is Agreed on for Two Years, to Commence from Christmas-day, the 25th day of December, Anno Domini 1698. within which Term, this Treaty may be reduc'd into good Order, and by the Blessing of God, a perpetual Peace

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

or a Truce for a sufficient Number of years may be Concluded, and Antient Friendship restor'd betwixt his Czarish Muscovite Ma∣jesty, and Turkish Sultan Majesty; There∣fore within this prefix'd time, all War, Bat∣tles, Fights, and Skirmishes, shall Cease, and on both sides all Hostilities shall be re∣mov'd and extinguish'd; nor shall any In∣cursion or Hostility be done, or any Damage committed, either privately or publickly by the Subjects of his Czarish Majesty, whether Muscovites or Cossacks, or others, within the Mussulman or Crimean Confines, or within any other of his Sultan Majesty's Do∣minions, or on any of his Subjects. In like manner on the part of his Sultan Majesty no sort of Troops of what Condition soever shall be brought against his Czarish Majesty, especially the Crimean Cham, and the Tar∣tars of what Nation or Hord soever shall be oblig'd not to make any Incursions, or do any Damage publickly or privately, either in the Cities, Towns, or Territories, Subject to his Czarish Majesty: And if contrary to this Constitution and Agreement made betwixt us, any privately or publickly should raise any Commotion, or make Preparation for it, or make Incursion, or Commit Hostility, such obstinate and disobedient Persons of what side soever they are, shall be Apprehended, Imprison'd, and Inevitably punish'd without Mercy: By this Method for the time ap∣pointed for this Cessation of Arms, all Con∣flicts and Hostilities shall be absolutely taken away and abolish'd, and both Parties shall apply to conclude a Peace, with sincere En∣deavours and full Inclination, and the Cri∣mean Cham, according to his Duty and De∣pendance upon his Imperial Turkish Majesty shall be concluded by this Peace. That all these Things may be accepted of, and observ'd by both Parties, because the highly mention'd Plenipotentiary Ambassadors and Commissaries of his Sultan Majesty, by Virtue of their Powers and Authorities, have deliver'd in due Form an Authentick Instrument written in the Turkish Language, and from that a Copy in Latin, Sign'd with their Hands and Seals; in like manner, I by Virtue of the Authority and full Power granted me, have deliver'd in due Form, an Authentic Instru∣ment Subscrib'd with my own Hand, and Con∣firm'd with my Seal, Written in the Ruthenic and Copy'd in the Latin.

[ 1699] INSTRUMENTUM PACIS INTER Serenissimum, & Potentissimum Regem, ET Rempublicam Poloniarum, ET Excelsum Imperium Ottomannicum, Ad Carlowiz in Sirmio, in Congressu Generali Confoedera∣torum Plenipotentiariorum confectae. In Nomine Sanctissimae & Individuae Trinitatis.

AD perpetuam Rei memoriam. Omnibus & singulis, quorum in∣terest notum sit, Quandoqui∣dem inter Regnum Polonicum, & Excelsum Imperium intercedens diutur∣num dissidium, Serenissimo & Potentissimo Magnae Britanniae, Franciae & Hyberniae Rege, Guilielmo III. & Praepotentibus Generalibus Foederati Belgii Statibus, si∣stendi humani Sanguinis, & reducendae reciprocae Quietis desiderio, ad procuran∣dos hujus almae Pacis Tractatus, Media∣tionem suam interponentibus, atque officia omnia, & omnes conditiones Mediationis, diligenti operâ & studio explentibus, Ex∣cellentissimis Dominis ad Fulgidam Portam Legatis Plenipotentiariis, Guilielmo Do∣mino Pagett, Barone de Beaudesert, in Comitatu Staffordiensi, ejusdem Comita∣tus Regis Locumtenente, ex parte Maje∣statis Britannicae: & Domino Jacobo Co∣lyer, ex parte Praepotentium Generalium Foederati Belgii Ordinum, favente Deo, reciprocâ utrinque inclinatione atque pro∣pensione sopiri, & penitùs extingui placue∣rit, atque Carlovizii ad Confinia Sirmii, ubi Congressus Legatorum Plenipotentia∣riorum ex Inclytae Mediationis dispositione institutus fuerat, initis Tractatibus de Pacis Articulis cum Illustrissimo & Excel∣lentissimo Domino Mehmet Effendi, Mag∣no Cancellario Excelsi Imperii, & Illustris∣simo atque Excellentissimo Domino Alex∣andro Mauro Cordato, de Nobili Stirpe Scarlati, ab Intimis Secretis ejusdem Ex∣celsi Imperii, ad tractandam Pacem Lega∣tis Plenipotentiariis, post aliquas Sessiones, tandem annuente Divinâ Clementiâ, Ne∣gotium hoc almae desiderataeque Pacis feli∣citer in mutuas Leges coaluerit, & integer∣rima iterum Amicitia, & Pax inter Sere∣nissimum, & Potentissimum Musulmanno∣rum Imperatorem Sultanum, Filium Sul∣tani Mehmeti, Sultanum Mustapha: & Se∣renissimum ac Potentissimum Regem, Au∣gustum Secundum, Dominum meum Cle∣mentissimum & Rempublicam Poloniarum, super undecim, mutuo consensu compositis

hisce Articulis, perpetuò religiosè inter utrumque Dominium observanda, perfecta & conclusa, restituta & renovata est, qui articuli subinde singulatim describuntur.

I.

CUM Excelso perpetuitati subnixo Im∣perio, multo abhinc tempore inter∣cedente ope, & favore Dei Altissimi sublatâ hostilitate, conciliationi & bonae vicinitati congruâ cum Sinceritate, antiquâ amicitiâ iterum coalescente, ut hostilitates utrinque amoveantur, & Subditi pristinâ securitate, quiete, ac tranquillitate fruantur, ante ul∣tima duo bella constituti veteres Limites restituantur ac stabiliantur, & Confinia Provinciarum subditarum Poloniae, à Con∣finiis Imperialibus tum Moldaviae, tum a∣liorum Districtuum, subjectorum Excelso Imperio, antiquis Limitibus separentur ac distinguantur, nevè utrinque aut praeten∣sio, aut extensio deinceps fiat, sed Limites antiqui sine mutatione aut perturbatione, tanquam sacri, religiosè observentur atque colantur.

II.

Quaecunque sive Munimenta, sive Loca vel majora, vel minora intra veteres Mol∣daviae Limites, ante penultimum bellum existentes, sita, atque hucusque detenta sunt à Dominis Polonis, eductis atque ex∣tractis inde Polonicis Militiis, evacuentur, & Moldaviae Provincia maneat ex integro libera, ante postremum bellum, in quo e∣rat pacifico Statu.

III.

Intra veteres quoque ante prostrema duo bella, versus Poloniam, Limites situm Ca∣menici Fortalitium, eductis inde Musul∣mannicis Militiis, evacuetur, & integrum relinquatur, & Podoliae atque Ukrainae Provinciarum nulla deinceps ab Excelso Imperio fiat praetensio, & Ukrainae Kosa∣corum Hatmani nomine Substitutus, qui modò in Moldavia residet, Hatmanus a∣moveatur. Cumque Limites antiqui Po∣loniae & Moldaviae manifesti sint, si com∣modum fuerit tempus, ab initio futuri Martii inchoetur evacuatio, & quàm citiùs fieri poterit, quamprimùm Polonica Mili∣tia è Moldavia educatur, & Munimenta & Loca illius evacuentur, & Moldavia ma∣neat libera. Simulque ab initio Martii Caminecensis Fortalitii evacuatio inchoe∣tur, atque evacuationis negotium, ubi priùs persici poterit, sine haesitatione, & sine tar∣ditate ac negligentia in executionem de∣ducatur, & Caminecensis Fortalitii evacua∣tio ad summum usque in decimum quin∣tum mensis Maii ad finem perducatur; & quò cum facilitate & celeritate dicti Forta∣litii fiat evacuatio, ad onera imponenda, & transvehenda, quoad fieri potest, curribus & Jumentis transportationem coadjuvent Poloni, & ubique evacuationis negotium cum securitate & salva re peragatur: in quibus evacuationibns Fortalitiorum, & aliorum Locorum, quoquo Pacto munito∣rum è Subditis, quicunque voluntariè exire velint, cum propriis rebus & Suppellectile exeant tutò & securè, & quicunque re∣manere velint, item tutò remaneant, & utrinque nullatenus impediantur. Et cùm evacuatio Fortalitiorum & Locorum à prin∣cipio Martii Mensis utrinque inchoari de∣beat, instantiam de Tormentorum Came∣nieci relictione, scilicet ex propriis atque ibi repertis, Ablegatus Polonus quampri∣mùm ad Fulgidam Portam expediendus, afferat ad Solium Imperatoris.

IV.

Nemo Subditorum Excelsi Imperii cu∣juscunque conditionis, praesertim verò Tar∣tari, cujuscunque Gentis, sub cujusvis prae∣tensionis, & controversiae praetextu, in Sub∣ditos Regis & Reipub. Poloniarum, & in Limites eorum hostilitates exercere, excur∣siones agere, Captivos rapere, Pecora abi∣gere, aut quidquid damni inferre, nevè eos offendere possit, expressis Regiis Edictis committatur, & demandetur Vesiriis, Beg∣lerbegis, & felicissimo Crimensi Hano, Ca∣relgaio, & Nuradino, & reliquis Soltanis, ac Woiewodae Moldaviae, ut adhibitâ maxi∣mâ sedulitate observent & conservent Con∣finiorum pacificam tranquillitatem, & con∣ciliationem atque quietem, nevè aut in captivationibus, aut Pecorum abactionibus, aut quacunque aliâ ratione damnis & mo∣lestiis afficiant Poloniae Subditos, & seve∣rissimè inquirant in perturbatores & trans∣gressores conditionum Pacis, atque habitâ notitiâ ad exemplum aliorum in illos ani∣madvertant, & rapta adinventa propriis Dominis restituantur, & si qui hac de re negligenter ac oscitanter agant, sive amissi∣one officiorum, sive privatione vitae, prout ex divinis Legibus convenerit, justè puni∣antur. Pariter Poloni has conditiones Pacis omnino, & sedulò observent atque colant, & nemo in oppositum quidquid audeat.

V.

Cùm Regnum Poloniae ab antiquo sit li∣berrimum, ab Excelso Imperio aut sub∣jectis eidem Gentibus, qualiscunque prae∣tensionis, aut expostulationis praetextu, nullâ penitùs hostilitate perturbetur, &

conclusae istius almae Pacis Pactorum vi, ad tales praetensiones nequaquam adstrin∣gantur.

VI.

Tempore hujusce belli Budziacenses, & alii Tartari è propriis Locis exeuntes, atque in Terras Moldavorum ingressi, hostilitates ac offensiones hac occasione in Moldavos & Moldaviam exercent: quod cùm sit contrarium sacris Capitulationibus ante hac concessis Regibus Poloniae, ac proinde ces∣sare ac sustolli debeat, à quibusque Locis & possessionibus, & praediis, & hyemali∣bus in Moldavia aut occupatis, aut de no∣vo extructis Tartari amoveantur, & nati∣vis propriis Locis habitent, atque pacificè vivant, & imposterum nullas offensiones faciant.

VII.

Religiosi Christiani Romano-Catholici juxta concessa ab Excelso Imperio edicta, ubicunque Ecclesias suas habent, consuetas suas functiones sine impedimento exerce∣ant, & pacificè vivant: & ulteriùs sibi com∣missas Instantias de Regione extraordinarias ad Fulgidam Portam Magnus Legatus ad Imperatorium Solium exponat.

VIII.

Cum Res Mercatoria è fructibus Pacis existat, atque Provincias in meliorem con∣ditionem reducat, utriusque Dominii Mer∣catores imposterum non per occulta loca meantes, sed per loca transitui opportuna ultrò citróque euntes & redeuntes, post∣quam solverint juxta consuetum ab anti∣quo Telonium rerum portatarum & expor∣tatarum, novis exactionibus, & expostu∣lationibus nequaquam molestentur, nevè ex numerata pecunia Telonium exigatur: & quicunque nativi Subditi Poloniarum, & Lithuaniae, & aliarum subjectarum iisdem Nationum ad Mercimoniam agendam ve∣nientes, & nullum damnum inferentes, praedictâ ratione mercaturam & coemptio∣nem, & venditionem, sicuti in anteceden∣tibus sacris Capitulationibus etiam decla∣ratur, exactione tributi dicti Haracz, & aliis inordinatis exactionibus ne molesten∣tur. Verùm enimverò, si qui relictis suis Regionibus in Imperii regnis sedem figant, & si qui alii Exteriores sese Polonis immis∣ceant, tales ne possint esse detrimento Rei∣publicae, Mercatores Polonorum redeun∣tes ex armis, & equis, & jumentis, & captivis, qui liberationis suae instrumentum legitimum habentes in Patriam redire vo∣luerint, nihil exigatur, & ne quisquam im∣pedimento sit taliter abeuntibus captivis. Verùm sub isto praetextu sine facultate ne∣mini liceat vetita abducere. Praeterea opi∣bus & rebus Mercatorum utriusque Domi∣nii, quibus in aliis Regionibus mori con∣tingat, publici Confiscatores & Partitores ne ab utralibet parte sese immisceant, sed inter Mercatores, cui sides adhibetur, tra∣dantur, ut juxta catalogum depositionis haeredibus tradat; si quis autem casus ac∣ciderit inter Mercatores, inter ipsos Prae∣positi decisione definiatur, ipse verò, quibus debet, rationem reddat. Ad debitum sive Scripto, sive Instrumento Judiciario non affirmatum solvendum contra Divinas Leges nemo compellatur, nevè Testimoniis solis conductitiis lites debitorum & sponsionum dicantur, aut audiantur, Instrumentis sci∣licet legitimis & Scriptis ante extraditis, sacris Mandatis perlectis atque considera∣tis, justè ac debitè causae decidantur, at∣que in similibus causis contexta & statuta in sacris Capitulationibus, ut aliis confoe∣deratis Nationibus concessa, in Polonos etiam Mercatores extendantur, & ulteriùs speciatim Polonis antehac concessorum, & in manibus eorundem servatorum sacrorum Edictorum sensus quoque colatur & obser∣vetur.

IX.

Captivi tempore belli abacti, pretiis il∣lorum juxta Leges comprobatis aut datis Juramentis in manifestum productis atque solutis juxta antecedentium Capitulatio∣num hac de re declarationem eliberentur. Si verò tales Captivi multo tempore servi∣erint, ex discretione pretia emptionum cum imminui debeant, si honesto & mediocri pretio cum Domino Captivi conveniri non poterit, Judices Locorum legitimè proce∣dentes, tales differentias componant. Si aliquâ occasione post conclusionem Pacis ex Regionibus Polonicis Captivi rapiantur; sine pretio dimittantur: & in Regnis Ex∣celsi Imperii, & inter Tartaros etiam ad eliberandos Polonos captivos circumeuntes Homines, quandocunque res suas pacificè agerent, praetextu operae eliberationi Cap∣tivorum navatae, aut aliâ ratione neuti∣quam offendantur, quinimò offendentes & detrimentum inferentes puniantur, Captivi in publicis Carceribus detenti permutati∣one utrinque in libertatem asserantur. Mag∣nus verò Poloniarum Legatus de Captivis suas Instantias ad Solium Imperiale asse re poterit.

X.

Quandocunque Serenissimus Rex Poloniae in stabilita cum Excelso Imperio Pace fir∣miter

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

permanebit, sicuti in antecedentibus Capitulationibus declaratur, Moldaviae Woiewodam eâ ratione, quâ ab antiquo cum Regibus Poloniarum sincerè sese prae∣stitit, rursus consuetâ ratione sincerè tra∣ctet: caeterum instar aliorum Subditorum Excelsi Imperii, uti priùs, pacati sint, & è Moldaviae atque Wallachiae Provinciis, si qui transfugerint, ne recipiantur; si qui aliâ methodo in Poloniae Dominium irrep∣serint, ac postea Provinciam suam pertur∣bare, & corrumpere deprehensi fuerint, similes Homines, quando perquirentur, reddantur, & conditio ista, cùm in antece∣dentibus Capitulationibus clarè, & mani∣festè posita sit, observetur. Pariter & Sub∣ditis Polonis, sive Poloni illi sint, sive Ko∣saci, cujuscunque Nationis extiterint, quan∣do perturbationem afferent, hinc etiam ne∣que recipiantur, neque protegantur, sed retrò reddantur. Et universi, quicunque turbare voluerint Pacem atque Amicitiam, haccine ratione conclusam, ex merito pu∣niantur.

XI.

Quaecunque conditiones, & Clausulae in antecedentibus Capitulationibus descriptae atque contentae, nullatenus adversantur de recenti conclusis Pactis, neque oppositae sunt liberis, & perpetuis Juribus utriusque Dominii, deinceps etiam colantur, & ob∣serventur, quae verò contrariae sunt, cas∣sentur, & annihilentur, favente & annu∣ente Deo Altissimo. Quae utrinque decla∣ratis, & exaratis Articulis perfectiori, & exactiori ratione conclusa Pax, & Concili∣atio inter Majestates Serenissimi & Poten∣tissimi altè memorati Poloniarum Regis, Domini mei Clementissimi, & Successorum ejus, & Rempublicam Polonam, & ex al∣tra parte Serenissimi, & Potentissimi Mu∣sulmannorum Imperatoris, ejusdemque Hae∣redum, ex voluntate & Clementia Dei per∣petua, stabilis, firma, & inconcussa perma∣neat, & conservata, atque custodita sit ab omni turbatione, & mutatione, & confu∣sione, & violatione, & uno eodemque te∣nore firmissimè perseveret, & constantissimè continuet; & ut omnes omnino hostilitates amoveantur atque sustollantur, quàm ci∣tissimè notitia praebeatur in Confiniis, Prae∣fectis & Gubernatoribus, ut sibi caveant, ne imposterum transgressiones fiant, neve altera pars alteri damna inferat. Verùm enimverò omnes utrinque sincerè & amicè sese praestent juxta istam almam Pacem. Ut autem omnibus cognita, & comperta sit istius almae Pacis Conclusio, triginta dies pro termino ponantur: post quem nullus praetextus, nullaque excusatio ac∣ceptabitur, sed in eos, qui adversabuntur, editis Edictis exactam obedientiam meren∣tibus severissimè animadvertatur. Post Subscriptionem autem Instrumentorum u∣triusque Partis Ablegatus priùs à Polonia missus, & ad Fulgidam Portam veniens, juxta antiquam consuetudinem afferat Re∣gias publicas Literas, Ratificationem Pa∣ctorum Instrumentis declaratorum conti∣nentes, atque Literas Imperatorias ratifi∣catorias item accipiat & deducat; Postea verò ad solennem confirmationem Pacto∣rum Pacis, & perfectionem reciprocae sin∣ceritatis, & absolutam terminationem mu∣tuae Amicitiae, & dispositionem, ac digesti∣onem reliquarum rerum, juxta laudatum veterem morem, adventurus Magnus Le∣gatus, quamprimùm commodè fieri poterit, moveat, ac proinde undecim numero Pactis conclusa juxta istas conclusiones alma Pax ab utraque Parte acceptetur atque colatur. Cùm verò altè memorati Illustrissimi, & Excellentissimi Domini Excelsi Imperii Ple∣nipotentiarii & Commissarii existentes Le∣gati, vi suae Facultatis, & auctoritatis Turcico Sermone exaratum legitimum & validum instrumentum tradiderint, ego quoque vi Facultatis, & Deputationis meae propriâ manu subscriptas, & Sigillo sigil∣latas à me praesentes Pactorum Literas tanquam legitimum, & validum Instrumen∣tum tradidi.

[ 1699] THE TREATY OF PEACE BETWEEN The Most Serene and Most Potent King, AND Republick of POLAND, AND The Sublime OTTOMAN Empire, Made at Carlovitz in Sirmium, in a General Congress of the Confederate Plenipotentiaries. In the Name of the most Holy and Individual Trinity.

TO the perpetual Memory of the Thing; Be it known to all and every one, whom it may Con∣cern: Whereas there has been a long War between the Kingdom of Poland, and the Sublime Empire; to stop the Effu∣sion of humane Blood, and with Desires of Restoring a mutual Quiet, the most Se∣rene and most Potent William III. King of Great Britain, France, and Ireland, and the States General of the United Provinces, in order to set on foot this Treaty of a happy Peace, have interpos'd their Medi∣ation, all the Duties and Conditions of which Mediation have with great Study and Industry been perform'd by their Ex∣cellencies the Plenipotentiary Ambassadors to the Fulgid Port, on the behalf of his Britannick Majesty, by William Lord Pagett, Baron de Beaudesert in the County of Staf∣ford, Lord Lieutenant of the said County, and on the part of the States General, by Lord Jacob Colyer; which War, through GOD's Blessing, by Reciprocal Inclinations on both sides, has been Compos'd and wholly Extinguish'd, at Carlovitz on the Confines of Sirmium, where, according to the Designment of the Illustrious Media∣tion, a Congress of the Plenipotentiary Ambassadors was appointed, and Treaties of Articles of Peace begun with the most Illustrious and most Excellent Lord, Meh∣met Effendi, Creat Chancellor of the Sub∣lime Empire, and the most Illustrious and most Excellent Lord, Alexander Mauro Cor∣dato, of the Noble Family of Scarlati, and Privy-Counsellor of the Sublime Em∣pire, Ambassadors Extraordinary for the Treaty of Peace; and after some Sessions, at length, by the Divine Goodness, this

Business of a happy and desir'd Peace was Digested into Terms agreed on both sides, and a most entire Friendship and Peace was Perfected and Concluded, Restor'd and Renew'd, between the most Serene and most Potent Emperor Sultan of the Mu∣sulmen, Sultan Mustapha, Son of Sultan Mehmet, and the most Serene and most Potent King Augustus II. my most Noble Lord, and the Republick of Poland, which Peace is to be Religiously observ'd betwixt both Dominions, and is Digested into Eleven Articles, which follow one by one.

I.

BY the Help and Blessing of God, Hosti∣lity with the High Empire founded on Eternity, having for some time ceas'd, and now the Ancient Friendship Agreeable to the Nature of Reconciliation and good Neighbour∣hood reviving, that all Acts of Hostility may be prevented, and the Subjects enjoy their Ancient Security, Quiet and Tranquillity, the Ancient Limits shall be establish'd and re∣stor'd to what they were before the two last Wars, and the Confines of the Provinces sub∣ject to Poland, shall by these Ancient Boun∣daries be separated and distinguish'd, as well from the Imperial Confines of Moldavia, as of those of all other Countries subject to the Sublime Empire, nor shall there on either side be any Pretension or Extension made but the Ancient Limits, without Change or Di∣sturbance, shall as Things Sacred, be Reli∣giously observ'd and maintain'd.

II.

Whatsoever Fortifications or Places; great or less, which before the War, before this lay within the Limits of Moldavia, and have hitherto been in the Possession of Polish Ma∣sters, the Polish Garrisons shall be withdrawn, and they shall be Evacuated, and the Province of Moldavia shall remain as free as ever, and in the same peaceable State it was before the last War.

III.

The Fortress likewise of Caminiec being before the two last Wars situated within the Ancient Limits towards Poland, shall be Eva∣cuated, and the Musulman Garrison with∣drawn, and shall be entirely left; Nor shall the Sublime Empire hereafter make any Pre∣tensions upon the Provinces of Podolia and the Ukrain; and the Deputy of the Ukrain Cossacks, who goes by the Title of Hatmannus, now residing in Moldavia, shall be remov'd. And considering the Ancient Limits of Po∣land and Moldavia are very plain, if the Season permits, the Evacuations on this side shall be begun by the beginning of the ensuing March, and the Polish Troops shall be with∣drawn out of Moldavia as soon as possible, and the Fortifications and Places shall be Evacuated, and Moldavia left free; And at the same time from the beginning of March, the Evacuation of Caminiec shall Commence, and the Business of the Evacution shall with∣out Hesitation, Neglect, or Delay, be put in Execution, as soon as it can be perform'd; and the said Evacuation of this Fortress of Caminiec, shall at farthest be compleated by the 25th of May, and that the Evacuation of the said Fortress may be perform'd with Speed and Ease; The Poles, shall, as much as possible, in order to the Lading and Carry∣ing away of Goods; assist the Transportation with Carriages and Cattle; and on all hands the Evacuation shall be carry'd on with Se∣curity and Safety: In all which Evacuations of Fortresses, and other Places, in whatsoever manner they are fortify'd, whosoever of the Subjects shall voluntarily desire to depart, may do it securely, and safely, with all their Effects and Goods; and whosoever of 'em have a mind to continue where they are, may in like manner safely do it; and there shall by no means be any Lett or Impediment on either side; and considering the Evacuation of all Fortresses and Places is to be commenc'd in the beginning of March: As to the Affair of leaving behind the Artillery at Caminiec, viz. those that were belonging to it, and were found there; the Polish Envoy that is to be sent to the Fulgid Port, shall lay that Demand before the Throne of the Emperor.

IV.

None of the Subjects of the Sublime Em∣pire, of whatsoever Condition, especially the Tartars, let 'em be of what Nation soever, shall under the colour of any Pretension or Con∣troversie presume to commit any Hostilities upon the Subjects of the King and Republick of Poland, or upon their Borders; and shall not presume to make Excursions, to take Cap∣tives, to drive away Cattle, or to do any sort of Damage, or give any sort of Distur∣bance, which shall be particularly express'd in Royal Edicts, and commanded to be put in Execution by Visiers, Beglerbegs, and the most Happy Crimean Cham, Carelgaius and Nuradinus, and the other Sultans, and the Weywode of Moldavia, that they, with ut∣most Diligence, secure the Peace, Quiet, and Tranquillity of the Borders; that neither by the Captures of Men, or driving away of Cattle, or by any other Means, the Polish Subject suffer any Losses or Disturbance, and that they make strict and severe Enquiries after the Disturbers and Transgressors of these Conditions of Peace, and when they come to

the knowledge of 'em, they Inflict Punishments upon 'em for Example to Others; and if in these matters any one acts carelessly or negli∣gently, he shall be duly punish'd as is Agree∣able to the Divine Laws. In like manner, the Poles on their part shall carefully observe and prosecute these Conditions of Peace, and let no Man dare to act any thing contrary to 'em.

V.

Considering the Kingdom of Poland was from Ancient Times entirely Independent, it shall not, by the Sublime Empire, and by any Nations subject to it, under the colour of any Pretension or Demand whatsoever, be disturb'd with any Hostility, nor upon the force of any Compacts of that happy Peace, shall they stand oblig'd to any such Pretensions.

VI.

In this War, the Budziac and other Tar∣tars, leaving their proper Seats, and entring upon the Lands of the Moldavians, do upon that pretence Exercise Hostilities upon, and Create Disturbances to Moldavia, and its Inhabitants, which being contrary to the Sa∣cred Capitulations formerly granted to the Kings of Poland, for that Reason ought to Cease and be prevented; therefore shall the Tartars be remov'd from all Places and Pos∣sessions, and Lands and Winter-Quarters, whether these were taken from others, or newly rais'd by them, and shall inhabit their Native Places, and live peaceably, and for the time to come Create no Disturbances.

VII.

The Regulars of the Church of Rome, ac∣cording to the Edicts granted by the Sublime Empire, wheresoever they have Churches, may without hindrance Exercise their usual Functions, and live peaceably; and besides, the Extraordinary Envoy to the Fulgid Port may lay before the Imperial Throne any new Demands upon this Head.

VIII.

Considering Merchandize is one of the Fruits of Peace, and brings the Provinces into a more thriving Condition; therefore the Merchants of each Party, not practising by any obscure Ways, but going and coming through conve∣nient and open Roads, after they have pay'd the usual and ancient Duty for things Ex∣ported and Imported, shall by no means be burden'd with new Exactions and Demands; nor shall a Duty in ready Money be Exacted; and whatsoever Native Subjects of the Two Polands and Lithuania, and of other Na∣tions subject to them, after this manner coming to exercise their Merchandize, their Buying and Selling, as is declared in former Sacred Capitulations, shall not be troubled with the Exaction of the Tribute call'd Ha∣racz, or any other unusual Exactions: But still with this Proviso, that any resolving to leave their Native Country, and set up their Rest in the Dominions of the Empire, or any Foreigners mixing themselves with Polanders, such shan't to the Detriment of the Govern∣ment enjoy this Exemption. Polish Mer∣chants leaving the War, and returning Home with their Horses and Carriages, and Cap∣tives, having an Authentick Certificate of their Dismission, and being desirous to return to their own Country, shall not be subject to any Exaction, nor shall any Lett or Obstruction be made to Captives thus going away. But still under this pretence, none without leave ob∣tain'd, shall presume to carry away things prohibited. Besides, the publick Officers of Justice shall not pretend to intermeddle in the Confiscation or Distribution of the Goods or Effects of Merchants Subjects to the one, dying in the others Dominions, but they shall be deliver'd into the hands of Merchants of Credit, that according to the Inventory they may be dispos'd of to the Right Heirs: But if any Difference happens betwixt the Mer∣chants themselves, this shall be Decided by the Consul or Chief, and let him be Account∣able to those whom he is subject to: None, contrary to the Divine Laws, shall be Com∣pell'd to pay any Debt, not verify'd in Wri∣ting, or by some Judiciary Instrument; nor shall the Causes of Debts or Contracts be Try'd or Decided by hireling Evidences, be∣cause upon the reading and considering the Divine Precepts, such sort of Suits are to be Decided only by Authentick Instruments and Writings of an Antecedent Date; And so in all Controversies of the like Nature, whatsoever Privileges are intermix'd and establish'd in the Sacred Capitulations, shall, as in the Grants to the other Confederate Na∣tions, be Interpreted and Extended to the Po∣lish Merchants; and besides the true meaning of all Grants by Sacred Edicts, (which are still preserv'd in their hands) particularly indulg'd to the Poles, shall be maintain'd and observ'd.

IX.

Captives carry'd away in time of War, shall be Releas'd pursuant to the Declaration about this matter in former Capitulations, upon Proofs made according to the Laws, of their Value, or by Oaths that make that manifest, the due Prizes being pay'd. But if the Cap∣tives have serv'd a long time, the Prizes of their Redemption ought to be proportionably

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

Abated; but if the Master of the Captive cannot be brought to a fair and moderate Price, the Judges of the Places proceeding in a legal Course, shall compose such Diffe∣rences: If after the Conclusion of the Peace, Captives shall be taken out of the Polish Territories, they shall be Dismiss'd without Ransom; Besides, Men going about for the Redeeming Polish Captives; whether in the Kingdoms of the Sublime Empire, or amongst the Tartars, as long as these Men shall be∣have themselves peaceably, they are by no means to be disturb'd, either upon this very pretence, that they make it their Business to deliver Captives, or upon any other Account whatsoever; nay, those that do Disturb 'em, or do 'em any Injury, shall be punish'd: Cap∣tives detain'd in publick Prisons, shall on both sides be Releas'd by Exchange: Farther, the Great Embassy of Poland may present his Demands concerning Captives to the Imperial Throne.

X.

As long as the most Serene King of Poland shall continue in this establish'd Peace with the Sublime Empire, as is express'd in former Capitulations, the Waywode of Moldavia shall continue to behave himself towards the Kings of Poland in the manner as was anci∣ently us'd: Let the Moldavians remain in Peace like the rest of the Subjects of the Sub∣lime Empire; and if any fly out of the Pro∣vinces of Moldavia, or Walachia, and take Refuge in Poland, they shan't be receiv'd; If any by more Subtle means slide themselves into the Polish Dominions, and shall be af∣terwards found out to Disturb or Corrupt their own Country, such sort of Men, when de∣manded, shall be surrendred up, and this Agreement as it remains, clearly and mani∣festly express'd in former Capitulations, shall be observ'd. The like Measures shall be us'd towards Polish Subjects, whether they be Poles or Cossacks, or of whatsoever Nation, when they shall create any Disturbance, they shall not be receiv'd nor protected on this part, but shall be surrendred up. And in general, whosoever go about to Disturb this Peace and Friendship thus concluded, shall be punish'd according to their Demerits.

XI.

All Conditions and Clauses describ'd and contain'd in former Capitulations, so far as they are not opposite to the present Compacts, nor contrary to the Independent and perpetual Rights of either Soveraignty, shall hereafter be observ'd and maintain'd; but those that are contrary, shall by the Blessing of the most High God be utterly Abolish'd and Annihi∣lated. Which Peace and Agreement betwixt the Majesties of the most Serene and most Potent highly above-mention'd King of Po∣land, (my most Gracious Lord) and his Suc∣cessors, and the Republick of Poland; and on the other part, of the most Serene and most Potent Emperor of the Mussulmen, and of his Heirs, as it stands concluded in these describ'd Articles, in a more perfect and exact manner; so by the Will and Goodness of God let it remain perpetual, stable, firm; and un∣shaken, and may it be preserv'd and kept from all Disturbance, Change, Confusion and Violation, and so without any Interruption, may it most firmly Persevere, and most con∣stantly Continue, and that all Hostilities may be remov'd and taken away, notice shall as soon as possible be given in the Confines, to all Commanders and Governours, that they take care to themselves, that no Transgressions be committed, and that neither side does Injury to the other; but that in great Sincerity and Friendship, all on each side Comport them∣selves as this happy Peace directs: That the Conclusion of this happy Peace may become known and certain to all, a term of Thirty days are appointed, after which no Pretence nor Excuse shall be receiv'd, but Edicts be∣ing issued, requiring an exact Obedience, who∣soever shall do any thing contrary shall be most severely punish'd. After the Subscrip∣tion of the Instruments of Peace on both sides, an Envoy sent from Poland, and coming to the Fulgid Port, according to Ancient Custom, shall bring the Royal Publick Letters, con∣taining a Ratification of the Pacts declar'd in these Instruments, and likewise shall receive and carry back with him the Imperial Letters of Ratification: But after this, in Order to a more solemn Confirmation of these Agree∣ments, and an absolute Completion of a mu∣tual Friendship, and for a more perfect Dis∣position and Digestion of all other Matters, the great Embassy, that according to Ancient Custom is to be sent, shall, as soon as possi∣ble, set forward; and therefore this happy Peace, compris'd in Eleven Articles, shall on each side be receiv'd and maintain'd. Now in Consideration that the highly men∣tion'd most Illustrious and most Excellent Lords, Plenipotentiaries and Ambassadors Commissionated of the Sublime Empire, have by Virtue of their full Powers and Authority, deliver'd in due Form an Authentick Instrument of this Peace, written in the Turkish Lan∣guage, I likewise by Virtue of full Powers, and my Deputation, have deliver'd the pre∣sent Writing of the said Peace, Subscrib'd with my proper Hand, and Seal'd with my Seal, as a Valid and Authentick Instrument.

[ 1699] TRATTATO DI PACE TRA L'Eccelso Imperio Ottomanno, E LA Serenissima Republica di Venezia.

TRattato di Pace tra' l'Eccelso Im∣perio Ottomanno, e la Serenis∣sima Republica di Venezia, con∣chiuso nel Congresso di Carlouiz nel Sirmio sotto le Tende alli 26 di Gena∣ro 1699; essendovi Ambasciatori Pleni∣potenziarii del l'Eccelso Imperio gl'Illustris∣simi & Eccellentissimi Signori Mehemet Ef∣fendi Gran Cancelliere, & Alessandro Mau∣ro Cordato; e per la Serenissima Repub∣lica l'Illustrissimo & Eccellentissimo Sig. Carlo Ruzini Cavalliere; Mediatori gl'Il∣lustrissimi & Eccellentissimi Signori Guliel∣mo Paghet Ambasciatore di Sua Maestà Brittannica, e Giacomo Colyer Ambascia∣tore degli Alti e Potenti Stati Generali delle Provincie Unite: oltre gl'Illustrissimi, & Eccellentissimi Signori Ambasciatori Pleni∣potenziarii di Sua Maestà Cesarea, e di Polonia, &c.

I.

LA Morea colle sue Citta, Fortezze, Ca∣stelli, Terre, Ville, Monti, Fiumi, Lag∣hi, Boschi, Porti, & ogni altra cosa, che si ritrova dentro la Circonferenza della mede∣sima, ora possessa dalla Republica di Ve∣nezia, resti pacificamente nel possesso, e Dominio dell'istessa Republica, tra'i suoi limiti del Mare, e dell'Essamiglio, ove so∣no li Vestiggi dell'antica muraglia, così che nè dal canto di Morea si faccia veruna estensione nella Terra Ferma, nè dal can∣to della Terra Ferma si faccia alcuna esten∣sione oltre i Limiti della Morea.

II.

La Terra ferma essendro nel possesso dell'Eccelso Imperio, resta totalmente nel pos∣sesso, e Dominio dell'istesso Imperio, per appunto nello Stato, che si trovava nel principio di questa ultima Guerra. La For∣tezza di Lepanto restarà evacuata dalla Re∣publica di Venezia. Il Castello detto di Rumelia nella parte di Lepanto si demolirà, e si demolirà parimente la Fortezza di Pre∣vesa, e si lasciarà in quella parte la Terra ferma nel suo primiero, & intiero Stato.

III.

L'Isola di Santa Maura colla sua Fortez∣za, e Capo di Ponte, detto Peracia, senza veruna estensione maggiore in Terra ferma, e l'Isola di Leucade attaccata à Santa Mau∣ra, restaranno nel possesso, e Dominio della Republica di Venezia.

IV.

LEvacuazione di Lepanto, e la Demoli∣zione del Castello di Rumelia, e di Prevesa, si esseguiranno subito doppo la distinzione de'i Limiti in Dalmazia; & in questo men∣tre per levare tutte le ostilità, & anco lé occasioni di queste, li Presidií de'i detti tr•• Luoghi si conteneranno dentro, nè faran∣no alcuna escursione nella Terra ferma, nè veruna pretensione per qualsivoglio pre∣testo, e gli Abitanti delli sudetti Luoghi possano restare, e partire, secondo che vor∣ranno, senza usarsi alcuna violenza.

V.

Li Golfi, che si trovano frà la Terra ferma, e la Morea restano all'uso commu∣ne, obligandosi l'una, e l'altra parte di conservarli immuni, e franchi da qualsivog∣lia cattiva Gente.

VI.

Le Isole dell'Arcipelago, e di quei Mari restaranno in quello Stato, che erano avant'il principio di questa ultima Guerra, nel pos∣sesso dell'Eccelso Imperio, nè si pretende∣ranno dalla Republica caraggi, ò siano con∣tribuzioni, od altra introdotto nel tempo della presente Guerra.

VII.

Per l'avenire l'Eccelso Imperio non pre∣tenderà dalla Republica di Venezia per l'Isola di Zante, nè dalli suoi Abitanti al∣cuna Pensione passata, ò futura. L'Isola di Egina colla sua Fortezza come adgia∣cente alla Morea, e posseduta dalla Re∣publica di Venezia, rimanerà col suo pre∣sente Stato nel possesso, e Dominio del l'istessa Republica.

VIII.

Nella Dalmazia le Fortezze di Cnin, Sing, e Ciclut, e Gabella, essendo al pre∣sente nel possesso, e Dominio della Repub∣lica di Venezia, restaranno nel pacifico pos∣sesso, e Dominio della medesima; mà poi∣che si devono porre li Limiti in tale forma, che li possessi restino chiari, e li Sudditi di ambe le parti in quiete, e tranquillità, nè si possa venir à qualsivoglia imaginable differenza, che possa in alcuna maniera di∣sturbare la tranquillità delli Confini: si è accordato, che dalla Fortezza di Cnin al∣la Fortezza di Verlika, e da quella alla Fortezza de Sing, e da questa alla Fortezza di Duare detta Zadvaria, e da questa alla Fortezza di Vergoratz, e parimente da questa alla Fortezza di Ciclut, e Gabella, si tirino Linee rette, e si separino li Confini, siche dentro le dette Linee verso il Domi∣nio Veneto, & il Mare tutte le Terre, e li Distritti colli Castelli, Forti, Torri, e Lu∣oghi chiusi, restino nel solo possesso, e Do∣minio della prememorata Republica: e le Terre, e Distritti, che saranno fuori della detta Linea, restino nel possesso, e Domi∣nio dell'Eccelso Imperio, colli Castelli, For∣ti, Torri, e Luoghi chiusi, essistenti in quelli, e non si permetterà per l'avenire alcuna estensione, e dilatazione, ò restriz∣zione nè dall'una, nè dall'altra parte. E le dette Linee secondo l'abilità de'i Luoghi si faranno chiare, e manifeste colli termini ò di Colli, e Boschi, ò di Fiumi, & acque correnti, & ove il luogo non darà l'eviden∣za, si poneranno segni di Fosse, ò Pali, ò Colonne, come frà li Commissarii d'ambe le parti destinati à questa designazione di commune concerto si trovarà à proposito; e perche dette Fortezze nel possesso della Republica habbiano anche in fronte spazio convenienti di Territorio, alle Fortezze di Cnin, Verlika, e Sing, Duare, e Vergo∣ratz, e Ciclut, si assignarà dalli Commissa∣rii lo spazio di un'ora di Paese, con retti∣tudine ò linea semicircolare, conforme lo permetterà, ò lo richiederà la convenienza del Terreno; la Fortezza di Cnin haverà il suo fianco verso le parti della Croazia, sin'al Confine del Cesareo Dominio, senza verun pregiudizio delli trè Dominii, che haveranno in quella parte li termini delli loro Confini, mà si haverà sempre da osser∣varsi il Jus accordato à cadaun di questi trè Dominii per questa universale Pace.

La sudetta linea si osservarà dall'una, e dall'altra parte; mà se vicino, ò dentro in quella, venisse à restare qualche For∣tezza dell'Eccelso Imperio, restando nelle spalle di quella il suo Territorio intiero, nella fronte semi-circolarmente haverà da goder il Terreno posto dentro la circonfe∣renza parimente dello spazio d'una ora, e per la Fortezza di Ciclut parimente nella fronte si darà il territorio nello spazio di un'ora, e nel fianco fuori della linea lo spazio di due ore di Terra, tirandosi una linea retta sin'al Mare.

Et in questa forma, e regola essendo di∣stinto il Confini, e posti li termini, e sepa∣rate le Terre da possedersi, si osservaranno inviolabilmente, e senza veruna mutazi∣one; e se alcuno mai haverà l'ardire di violare qualche segno, ò di trasgredire qualche termine, e gli Uffiziali ancora, che mancaranno, nella dovuta cura col merita∣to castigo delli delinquenti, tanto dall'una, quanto dall'altra parte, saranno severa∣mente puniti.

E se à caso li Commissarii havessero l'incontro di qualche difficoltà, che non potessero accordarsi: informaranno li loro Padroni sinceramente, e realmente, affin∣che cogli Usfizii delli Rappresentanti delle Maestà Cesarea, e Brittannica, e degli alti Potenti Stati Generali delle Provincie Unite presenti alla fulgida Porta si defini∣sca amichevolmente: E per simile od al∣tra qualsivoglia differenza di Confine non si venirà ad alcuna ostilità, nè s'intorbida∣rà la quiete delli Sudditi, nè s'intenderà alterare la Pace conchiusa coll'Eccelso Im∣perio.

IX.

Il Territorio, e li Distritti della Signoria di Ragusa saranno continuati colli Territo∣rii, e Distritti dell'Eccelso Imperio, levan∣dosi ogni ostacolo, che impedisce la conti∣nuazione, e la communicazione delle Terre della detta Signoria colle Terre del mede∣simo Imperio.

X.

Nella vicinanza di Cattaro, Castelnuo∣vo, e Risano, essendo attualmente nel pos∣sesso, e Dominio della Republica di Vene∣zia, restino nel pacifico possesso, e Dominio della medesima Republica, colle lora Terre; e l'istesso s'intènda per qualunque altra For∣tezza in quella parte essistente attualmente nel possesso della medesima. E li Commis∣sarii, che saranno destinati dall'una, e l'al∣tra parte, siino d'esperimentata probità, af∣finche senza alcuna propria passione, giudi∣cando realmente questo importante affare, anco in quella parte separino li Territorii, è li distinguano con evidenti segni, siche si levi l'occasione d'ogni torbidezza, mà da quella parte ancora si avertisca, che non s'interrompa la continuazione intiera delle Terre di Ragusa, con quelle dell'Imperio.

XI.

Dovendost cominciare la designazione del Confine di ambe le parti in Dalmazía; e nella parte di Cattaro al primo tempo che sarà commodo, li Commissarii Deputati à questa opera corrispondendo con previi avi∣si faranno la loro congiunzione in luogo conveniente, con comitiva di Gente mili∣tare bensì, mà pacifica, e quieta, d'ugual numero, e coll'ajuto d'Idio cominciaranno la loro funzione dal giorno dell'Equinotio de'i 22/12 Marzo dell'anno corrente, & ado∣praranno ogni diligenza nella distinzione dell'uno, e dell'altro Confine delle sudet∣te parti, affinche con prestezza finiscano nel termine di due Mesi, e più presto, se si può fare.

XII.

Quanto più è desiderata la fermezza dell'amicizia, e la quiete delli Sudditi di ambe le parti, tanto più devono essere u∣gualmente abominati quelli, che portati dal reprobo loro ò genio, ò costume, anco nel tempo di Pace con ladronecci, & altri ostili essercizii intorbidano la tranquillità del Confine, perciò nè dall'una parte nè dall'altra si darà ricetto, ò fomento à tali forusciti di qualsivoglia sorte, mà saranno perseguitati, presi, e consegnati, acciò che ad essempio di altri siino col meritato casti∣go puniti, e sarà per l'avenire proibito l'ap∣poggio, & il mantenimento di questi mali Huomini.

XIII.

A cadauna delle parti sia lecito di risar∣cire, riparare, e fortificare le posseduto Fortezze, mà non già di fabricarne di nuovo altre Fortezze, appresso il Confine, ò le Fortezze demolite dalla Republica di Venezia nelle Sponde della Terra ferma; Per la commodità però de'i Sudditi sia le∣cito di porre Borghi, e Villaggi per tutto, osservandosi trà di loro pacificamente ogni buona corrispondenza, e vicinanza, e con∣tenendosi nelli proprii termini; e se à caso succedesse frà lora alcuna differenza, subito convenendo li Prefetti del Confine d'ambe le parti amichevolmente, e con ogni giu∣stizia levino l'occasione di qualsivoglia contrasto.

XIV.

Tanto per la Religgione, e par la liber∣tà, e permuta degli Schiavi, quanto per il Traffico, si osservarà lo Stile, e tenore delle antecedenti Capitolazioni, e sarà le∣cito all'Ambasciatore della Republica di portarne le sue ulteriori istanze al Soglio Imperiale: Intanto circa il Traffico siano confermati anco per questa Pace li sacri commandamenti concessi peravanti alla Re∣publica, & il Traffico haverà da godere la sua forma, che haveva avanti questa ul∣tima Guerra, e li Mercanti della Nazione Veneta tutti li Privileggi, che le sono stati concessi.

XV.

Sin' al giorno delle immediate Sotto∣scrizzioni frà li Plenipotenziarii dell'Ec∣celso Imperio, e della Republica di Vene∣zia, dal giorno della Sottoscrizzione delli Plenipotenziarii di Sua Maestà Cesarea, e di Polonia dell'accordato per la Repub∣lica, deve cessar ogni ostilitâ d'ambe le par∣ti tanto per Terra, quanto per Mare; & osservarsi ogni buona corrispondenza, & affinche li Rettori di ogni Confine habbia∣no la notizia di questo Armistizio, si pone per le parti di Bosnia, Albania, e Dalmazia il termine di trenta giorni, e per le parti dell'Isola di Candia, e di Morea, e gli al∣tri Confini di quelle parti, si pone il ter∣mine di giorni quaranta, doppo e dentro quali termini al possibile dal canto dell'Eccelso Imperio, e dal canto della Repub∣lica di Venezia non si contravenirà ad al∣cuno di questi Articoli, che si potranno osservare.

Si concede inoltre alli Sudditi una vera, & universale amnestia, e qualsivoglia loro fatto, ò delitto commesso in tempo di Gu∣erra, passando in totale oblivione, nissuno di essi, come delinquente, sarà per l'ave∣nire castigato, e molestato.

[ 1699] THE TREATY of PEACE BETWEEN The Sublime OTTOMAN Empire, AND Most Serene Republick of VENICE.

THE Treaty of Peace between the Sublime Ottoman Empire, and the most Serene Republick of Venice, concluded in the Con∣gress of Carlovitz in Sirmium, under Tents, the 26th Jan. 1699. The Ambassadors there present on the part of the Sublime Empire, were the most Illustrious and most Excel∣lent Signiore's, Mehmet Effendi, Great Chancellor, and Alexander Mauro Cordato, and on the part of the most Serene Re∣publick the most Illustrious and most Ex∣cellent Signior Charles Ruzini, Kt. The Mediators, the most Illustrious and most Excellent Signiore's William Pagett, Am∣bassador of his Britannick Majesty, and James Colyer Ambassador of the High and Mighty States General of the United Pro∣vinces; besides, the most Illustrious and most Excellent Signiore's, Ambassadors Plenipotentiaries of his Coesarean Majesty, and of Poland, &c.

I.

THE Morea, with all its Cities, For∣tresses, Castles, Lands, Villages, Moun∣tains, Rivers, Lakes, Woods, Ports, and ev'ry thing else, that is found within the Circumference of it, now in the Possession of the Republick of Venice, shall remain peace∣ably in the Possession and the Dominion of the said Republick, as it stands Bounded by Sea and by Land, by that Line where remain the footsteps of the Antient Wall, so that from within the Morea, that Land shall not be Ex∣tended any farther towards the Terra Firma, nor on the side of the Terra Firma shall they exceed these Limits of the Morea.

II.

The Terra Firma that is in the Possession of the Sublime Empire, shall remain entirely in the Possession and Dominion of the said Empire, exactly in the State it was in, in the beginning of the last War. The Fortress of Lepanto shall be Evacuated by the Republick of Venice, the Castle of Rumelia on the side of Lepanto, shall be Demolish'd, and like∣wise the Fortress of Preveza shall be Demo∣lish'd, and the Terra Firma on that side shall be left in its first intire State.

III.

The Isle of St. Maura, with its Fortress, and that Entrance upon the Bridge call'd Pe∣racia, without any farther Extension of it to∣wards the Terra Firma, and the Island of Leucade adjoyning to St. Maure, shall re∣main in the Possession and Dominion of the Republick of Venice.

IV.

The Evacuation of Lepanto, and the De∣molishment of the Castle of Rumelia, and of Prevesa, shall be perform'd immediately after the Separation made of the Limits of Dalma∣tia; and in the mean time to prevent all Hostilities and all Occasions of Complaint, the Garrisons of the Three said Places shall keep themselves at Home, and shall not make any Excursion into the Terra Firma, nor any De∣mand upon what pretence soever, and the In∣habitants of the said Places may either stay behind, or go away, without any Violence to be us'd towards 'em.

V.

The Gulphs that are betwixt the Terra Firma and the Morea, shall remain in Com∣mon, and each Party does oblige it self to Clear and Preserve 'em free from Robbers.

VI.

The Islands of the Archipelago, and of those Seas shall remain in the State they were before the beginning of this last War, in the possession of the Sublime Empire, and the Re∣publick shall not pretend from 'em any Duties

or Contributions, or any thing else introduc'd in the time of the present War.

VII.

For the time to come, the Sublime Empire shall not pretend from the Republick of Ve∣nice, or from the Inhabitants, any Pension pass'd or future upon account of the Island of Zante. The Island of Egina, with its For∣tress being adjacent to the Morea, and in possession of the Republick of Venice, shall in its present State remain in the Possession and Dominion of that Republick.

VIII.

In Dalmatia, the Fortresses of Cnin, Sing, Ciclut, and Gabella, being at present in the Possession and Dominion of the Republick of Venice, shall remain in the quiet Possession and Dominion of the same; but because the Limits ought to be put into such a Form, that Possessions may be distinguish'd, and the Subjects of both Parties rest in Quiet and Tranquillity; and that they may not come to any sort of imaginable Difference, which might Disturb the Peace of the Confines, it is agreed, that a streight Line be drawn from the For∣tress of Cnin to the Fortress of Verlika, and from that to the Fortress of Sing, and from that to the Fortress of Duare call'd Zadveria, and from that to the Fortress of Vergoratz, and likewise from that to the Fortress of Ci∣clut and Gabella a streight Line shall be drawn, and thus the Confines shall be sepa∣rated, so that within the Lines towards the Venetian Dominion and the Sea, all the Lands and Districts, with the Castles, Forts, Towers, and inclos'd Places, shall remain in the sole Possession and Dominion of the fore∣said Republick, and the Lands and Districts, which shall be without the said Line, shall re∣main in the Possession and Dominion of the Sub∣lime Empire, with all the Castles, Forts, Towers, and inclos'd Places that are there, and for the time to come no sort of Encroach∣ment, Extension, or Restriction on one side or other shall be permitted: And the said Lines, according to the nature of the Place, shall be made plain and manifest by the Boundaries either of Hills or Woods, or Rivers or Cur∣rents, and where the place won't afford the evidence of such Marks, there shall these Distinctions be made by Ditches, or Pales, or Pillars, as shall be agreed by the Commissaries of both Parties by common consent design'd for this purpose, and that these Fortresses might have in the Front of 'em, a convenient space of Territory; The Commissaries shall assign a quantity of Land of about one Hour (about three miles) to the Fortresses of Cnin, Ver∣lika, and Sing, Duare, and Vergoratz, and Ciclut, to be measur'd either in a right or semicircular Line, according as the Con∣venience and Circumstances of the Land will permit; the Fortress of Cnin shall have its Flank towards the Parts of Croatia, even to the Confines of the Caesarean Dominion, with∣out any prejudice to those Three Potentates, the Boundaries of whose Dominions terminate thereabouts; but the Rights accorded to each of these Three Governments by this Universal Peace shall always be observ'd.

The foresaid Line shall be observ'd by each Party, but if in the Neighbourhood of it, or within it, there happens to be any Fortress belonging to the Sublime Empire, which just behind it has an entire Territory belonging to it, then shall it enjoy from the Front the quantity of Land of an Hour, Circumscrib'd within Semicircular Circumference; and as to the Fortress of Ciclut, that shall likewise have from the Front a Territory of one Hour, and in the Flank, besides that Line, the space of two Hours of Land, to be measur'd by a right Line to the Sea.

And in this Form, and by this Regulation, the Confines distinguish'd, and the Limits settled, and the Lands of each Possession se∣parated, shall be inviolably observ'd, and without any alteration; and if any one shall have the Boldness to violate these Marks for Boundaries, or commit Trespasses on these Limits; and even Officers that shall be want∣ing of a due Care in punishing Delinquents, shall be severely punish'd, as well on one side as on the 'tother.

And in Case the Commissaries shall meet with any Difficulty which they can't Agree, they shall truly and sincerely inform their Pa∣trons, to the end that by the good Offices of the Representatives to the Fulgid Port of their Caesarean and Britannick Majesties, and of the High and Mighty States General of the United Provinces, the matter may be amicably determin'd, and from any such like Difference about the Confines, no Hostilities shall ensue, nor shall the peace of the Sub∣jects be disturb'd, nor shall it be interpreted to break the Peace concluded with the Sublime Empire.

IX.

The Territory and Districts of the Signory of Ragusa, shall continue joyned to the Terri∣tories and Districts of the Sublime Empire, and all Obstacles shall be remov'd that may hinder the Continuation and Communication of the Lands of the said Signory with the Lands of the foresaid Empire.

X.

All in the Neighbourhood of Cattaro, Ca∣stelnuovo and Risano, that is actually in the possession and Dominion of the Republick of Venice, shall remain in the peaceable Possessi∣on and Dominion of the said Republick, with

all the Lands appertaining; and this same is to be understood of any other Fortress on that side being now actually in the possession of the said Republick; And the Commissaries that shall be appointed on one side, and the other, shall be Men of an Experienc'd Probity, that they may without partiality and prejudice, equally decide this important Affair; And here two Separations shall be made by evident Signs, that all occasions of Disturbance may be remov'd, but good notice is to be taken, that the said entire Continuation of the Lands of Ragusa be not interrupted.

XI.

The Distinction of the Limits on both sides in Dalmatia and about Cattaro, being to be set on foot as soon as ever the Season will per∣mit, the Commissaries design'd for this work giving previous Advices, they shall indeed have a Military Attendance, but a peaceable and quiet one, of equal number on each side, and by the help of God they shall enter upon this Office on the day of the Equinox of this instant Year, viz. 12/22 March, and shall in the foresaid Places use all their Diligence in distinguishing and separating one Confine from the other, that they may with Expedition fi∣nish the matter in two Months and sooner if it be possible.

XII.

As the Continuance of the Friendship and Quiet of the Subjects on both sides is earnest∣ly desir'd, so ought those to be equally abomi∣nated, who, carry'd on by their own ill Dispo∣sition or Custom do in the time of Peace, with Robberies, and other hostile Acts, disturb the Tranquillity of the Confines; therefore no Re∣ception nor Encouragement shall be given to these Banditti of what sort soever by either Party, but they shall be pursu'd, taken, and deliver'd up, that for an Example to others, they may undergo their deserv'd Punishment, and for the time to come all Assistance and Maintenance shall be forbid to be given to such evil Men.

XIII.

It shall be lawful for each Party to amend, repair, or fortifie the Fortresses in their Pos∣session, but not to build Fortresses a-new near the Confines, or to rebuild the demolish'd For∣tresses of the Republick of Venice, on the sides of the Terra Firma; But for the Con∣venience of the Subjects, it shall be lawful for them any where to erect open Towns or Villages, maintaining peaceably amongst them∣selves good Correspondence and Neighbour∣hood, and containing themselves in their pro∣per Bounds; and if by chance any Difference happens amongst them, the Governours of the Confines for both Parties meeting peaceably amongst themselves, shall with all Justice take away the occasion of any manner of Dispute.

XIV.

The Ancient Method and the Tenor of the Antecedent Capitulations shall be observ'd as well in the matter of Religion, and Liberty, and Exchange of Slaves, as in Traffick; and it shall be lawful for the Venetian Ambas∣sador to lay his farther Demands on these Subjects, before the Imperial Throne: In the mean time the Sacred Edicts granted hereto∣fore to the Republick, stand also confirm'd by this present Peace and Traffick, shall enjoy the same Form it had before the last War, and the Merchants of the Venetian Nation all the Privileges that have been granted to 'em.

XV.

All Hostilities shall cease, as well by Land as by Sea, and a good Correspondence be main∣tain'd, as well from the day of the immediate Subscriptions of the Plenipotentiaries of the Sublime Empire, and of the Republick of Ve∣nice, as from the day of the Subscription of the Plenipotentiaries of his Cesarean Majesty and of Poland to this Agreement by the Re∣publick; and that the Governours of the Con∣fines may have notice of this Truce, for the Countries of Bosnia, Albania, and Dalmatia, Thirty days are appointed, and Forty days for the Parts about the Island of Candia and the Morea, and all the other Confines on that side; and after and within those Terms, as far as possible, neither on the part of the Sublime Empire, nor on the part of the Re∣publick of Venice, shall any Contravention be made to these Articles, which can any ways be observ'd.

Moreover, by these Presents, a true and universal Amnesty is granted to all Subjects upon the account of any Fact or Crime commit∣ted during the War, all those things shall be pass'd over in Oblivion, nor shall any one for the time to come upon that account be punish'd or molested as a Delinquent.

[ 1699] Extract of a Letter from Constantinople, of the 12/22th of February, 1700.

ON the 29th of January, O.S. Count Otting the Emperor's Ambassa∣dor, made his publick Entry here: First, marched the Basha of Nicopoli, with his Retinue, who conducted the Ambassador from Rutsick hither; after him an Oda of Janisaries, with their Aga and Officers; then came the Dutch Ambassadors Gentleman of the Horse, his led Horses, my Lord Pagett's Secretary, with three Gentlemen, and 12 Men in Liveries, all the English Nation; and then followed the Chiousses, Visier Agas, the German Ambassadors Officers, five Led Horses, the Gentlemen Hautboys, Trum∣peters, Noblemen, and he himself on Horseback, having 20 Trabants on both sides, his Drugoman, and the rest of his Retinue: He came in by Adrianople Gate, through part of the City, and out again by Fenar-Gate on the Water-side, so to Ujup, Kehathana; and finally to Pera, where he is lodged in Hattum Hussein Aga's House, not far from my Lord Pagett's.

The ••3/13th Instant he had his Audience of the Vizier, where he was Clothed with a Sable Vest, and his Gentlemen to the num∣ber of 100 with Caftans.

The 6/16th his Excellency went in Pomp to the Sultan: The reason why he had his Audiences so soon, is, because the Turks Ramazan or Lent begins on Friday the 9/19th, and therefore they could not then receive him with the usual Ceremonies.

There being here at present more Am∣bassadors than has been seen these 18 years, there passes a great many Visits between them; my Lord Pagett has been the 19th of January to Visit the French Ambassador, and he my Lord the 1st instant; on the 5th my Lord went to the Venetian Ambassador, and the 7th to the Emperors: The 8th, The French Ambassador sent a Gentleman to Count Otting, to Compliment him up∣on his Audience of the Sultan, adding, that he hoped to have the Honour to Salute him, and doubted not but that his Excel∣lency (according to the Custom of this place) would see him before any other Ambassador; upon which Count Otting sent a Gentleman to the French Ambassador to assure him of his Intention to keep Friendship and good Correspondence with him; but as for the Visits, he could not but observe the Custom practised in all the Courts of Christendom, to pay the Visits in the order as they were given him; and as the English Ambassador had first sent to him to felicite his Arrival, and had visited him in Person, he could not but repay him the first Visit; whereupon the French Am∣bassador told the Gentlemen, Je suis faché que de la maniere que les choses sont, je ne puis pas me donner l'honeur de salver son Ex∣cellence; time will shew if he persists in this Resolution. The Venetians are also much Incensed against the Hollander, for having Visited the Imperial Ambassador the first, and thereby Usurped, as they say, their Right of Precedency.

I will trouble you further with the De∣scription of my Lord's Cavalcade when he delivered the King's Letters.

His Excellency with his Retinue went on Horseback from his Palace to the Water∣side, where 40 Boats, each with 7 Oars on a side, were prepared for the Transporta∣tion of himself and his Retinue: He Em∣barked, and in his passage was Saluted by the K. William and Dalaware, two English Ships then in Port, which had placed themselves in the middle of the River for that purpose: Being landed on the other side, we found our Horses in a readiness, and every thing disposed to begin a regular March: First went six Janisaries, then the Gentlemen of the Nation all mighty well mounted, and their Horses richly ac∣coutred; then 50 of his Excellencies Li∣veries, two and two, his 16 Interpreters, his Gentlemen of the Horses at the Head of 7 led Horses; after that, the Honour∣able Thomas Pagett, encompassed with Foot∣men, two of which held the Reins of his Bridle, he himself carrying the King's Let∣ters at Arms length: After him went his Excellency, preceded by 6 Pages, and sur∣rounded with Heydukes and Selict-Coha∣dars, his Excellencies Gentlemen and Offi∣cers to the number of 30, all well mounted. In this manner we rode through the Prin∣cipal Streets of Constantinople to the Grand Visier's Palace, where his Excellency wa•• received with all the Demonstrations of Civility and Respect, he himself being first Vessell by the Visier Azem, then such of his Retinue as were thought by his Excellency deserving that Honour. The Ceremony being over, his Excellency re∣turned in the same manner to his Palace, where was prepared a sumptuous Enter∣tainment for all that accompanied him.

On the 16th of February, N. S. the Turkish Ambassador had Audience of the Emperor, and was conducted to the Pa∣lace. The Emperor received him in the Council-Chamber, seated on his Throne under a rich Canopy, and attended by his Principal Ministers of State, and other Persons of the first Quality: The Ambas∣sador when he entred the Room, made a low Reverence, another in the middle of the Chamber, and the third near the Throne. He went up the Steps of the Throne, presented his Credentials, and laid them on the Table that was before the Emperor, and then returned to the Place, where he made his Speech in his own Lan∣guage, containing an Assurance of the Sul∣tan his Master's Friendship, and sincere In∣tentions, strictly to observe the Treaty between the two Empires lately conclu∣ded, which being interpreted by the Sieur Della Torre, the Emperor commanded Count Caunitz, Vice-Chancellor of the Empire, to return an Answer, which he accordingly did in High Dutch, and the same was Interpreted to the Ambassador by the Sieur Della Torre. Then the Am∣bassador ordered hi Steward to bring in the Grand Signior's Presents; a List of which he laid upon the Table, with a Letter from the Grand Vizier, and going once more up the Steps to the Throne, kissed the Border of the Emperor's Robe, his Attendants at the same time ma∣king a very low Reverence. After which the Ambassador withdrew, walking back∣wards while he was in the Emperor's Pre∣sence, and making three Reverences in like manner as when he came into the Room, and was reconducted to his House, and nobly entertained.

A LIST of the Presents presented to the Emperor by the Turkish Ambassador.

A Large Tent or Pavillon, very rich∣ly adorned with Testons of Gold Embroidery, the Staves finely gilt and painted. A Plume of Red and White Fea∣thers, set with 52 Diamonds great and small. A Bridle covered with Gold, and enamelled with Red and White, set with 531 Diamonds, and 338 Rubies; the Bit, Curb, and other things belonging thereto, all of fine Gold. A pair of Stirrups of Gold, set with 128 Diamonds, and 204 Rubies. A Housse wrought with Flowers in Gold, richly set with Rubies, Pearls, and Emeralds. A great Silver Mace inlaid with Gold, and set with 16 Rubies and 25 Emeralds, with Straps to hang it up by, made of Red Brocado Silk embroider'd with Pearl, Emeralds. A red Velvet Saddle em∣broider'd with Pearl, Emeralds and Gold. A Velvet Saddle-Cloth, embroider'd with 3 Gold Roses. A Sumpture-Case of Scarlet Cloth, embroidered with Gold. A Bridle covered with Gold, enamelled with dark Blue, the Bit and other Appurtenances of Gold; the whole set with 112 Emeralds, 381 Rubies, and 49 Diamonds. A pair of Silver-gilt Stirrups. A Housse, embroi∣dered with 26 Roses of Pearl and Coral. A Velvet-Saddle, wrought with Gold and Silver. A Velvet Saddle-Cloth, embroi∣dered with three golden Roses. A Sum∣pter-Case of Scarlet Cloth, embroidered with Flowers of Gold. A Piece of Amber, weighing 89 Ounces. Fifteen Bezoar Stones. Ten Lumps of Musk. Two Pieces of Cloth of Gold. Two Pieces of Red Sattin, wrought with Gold. Six Pieces of very rich Gold Brocado. Four Pieces of Silk Brocado, wrought with Gold. Ten Pieces of fine Callico, called Duezarhi. Thirty five Pieces of fine Cal∣lico, commonly called Imperial. Twenty Pieces of fine Callico, wrought With Gold. Four Persia Carpets, wrought with Gold. Four other Carpets of Turky-work. A Dun-coloured Horse of Turcomania. A Bay Horse of Turcomania. A Light-dun Horse of the Country called Beideleugh. A Bay Horse of Arabia. Two Silver Chains to fasten Horses to the Stall. A Silver Trough for the Horses to drink in. Two Leopards covered with Clothes of Persia Brocado, and tied with Silver Chains.

Particulars of the Presents which the Em∣peror by his Ambassador gave to the Grand Seignior.

THirty-six Seiket Cups with Covers and Sotto Coppe. Twelve Ewers and Basons, six of which were gilt. Ten hanging Clocks, in Silver emboss'd Frames. Eight great Clocks, in form, like the Pedestal of a Pillar, and the Clock-work in the middle. A curious inlaid Cabinet. Abundance of very rich Brocades. A great oval Looking-Glass, in a square inlaid Frame. A great Silver Fire-Pan (alla Turca) 1 ½ foot high from the ground, cu∣riously wrought and very substantial. A Silver Screen six foot high, very solid, and the top made like a Schollop Shell. A Fire Hearth (alla Franca) the Bars of which were of polished Steel, the sore part of it of Silver, at each end it had a pyramid of Silver, and in the middle a great Ball. A pair of Tongs, Fire-Shovel and Proger of polished Steel, with Silver Heads Twenty-four Silver Sconces, with Look∣ing-Glasses in the middle of them. Two great Silver Tables (alla Turca) at least an Ell in Diameter. Twelve gilded Tum∣blers. Two great Silver emboss'd Dishes, at least 7 foot in Diameter. Two great gilded Ewers and Dishes of the same big∣ness. Six great Silver Flower-Pots. Six standing Lamps, emitting Branches like those in our Churches. A Silver Fountain, 8 foot high, in Foliage-work. Two Frank Tables, and two pair of Stands very pret∣tily inlaid. Two standing Clocks, the Cases of which were of the same Work. A great Looking-Glass set about with Stones of divers colours, having a Dial-Plate in the middle of it, and the Figure•• ingeniously cut.

The Last Account of Count TEKELY.

TEKELY was a Count of the Kingdom of Hungary, and one of the most Ancient Families thereof, and one of the most Zealous Professors, and Assertors of the Protestant Religion, which caused him to joyn with the Turks, through the whole Course of the last Wars, of which we have given an ample Account in the due places of this History, whereby appear the great Services which this Noble Person did them, and how ill and barbarously they sometimes used him.

I have particularly instanced how this present Sultan being at Belgrade, where having occasion for this Tekely's Services, he sent a Capugi-bashee or two, to fetch him thither from Constantinople, where he had Lodged himself for Recovery of his Health, being informed by the Physicians at Con∣stantinople, that the Air of that City was much better than that of Adrianople. The Officers who are sent from the Grand Seig∣nior to execute any of his Commands, do commonly perform them without any Consideration, or Ceremony, or Respect to the Person to whom they are sent, and so they did to Tekely, whom finding in his Bed, labouring under a grievous Fit of the Gout, they rudely forced him to arise, and without any Remorse, threw him into a Waggon, and hurried him away to Bel∣grade, to receive such Commands as the Grand Seignior had to employ him in; and on all Occasions as the hopes of a Peace appeared, the Neglects put upon him did daily increase.

It is commonly the Humour of the Turks, after they have done with the Ser∣vice of any Person, never more to treat them kindly, nor if they can to suffer them to Live: Of which we have a fresh Instance by Letters of the 15th of July last from Constantinople, which tell us, That the Chimacam of that place had re∣ceived an Express Command, or Decree, from the Sultan, to Exile or Banish Tekely, into some Island of the Archipelago.

At the first coming of this News Tekely was strangely Surprised, and was half Dead with the Apprehensions thereof; the Remembrance of his Journey to Belgrade, and Terrours thereof, were scarce out of his Mind, before another Scene of Banishment was presented to him, into an Island where was no Sustenance fit for his Weak Indi∣sposed Body, nor no Consolation, or Com∣fort to be expected from Society, or Con∣versation of Mankind; nor yet from his Wife neither, who, poor Lady, by this hard Usage, was struck with an Astonish∣ment, and both joyned together in their loud Exclamations against the Ingrati∣tude, and Tyranny of Princes, who have no Tenderness of Compassion for any but themselves; for if they had had, they would never have exposed two such Noble Families unto Ruine and Destruction.

After all which Hardship, it is believed, that the Turks will scarce suffer them to ar∣rive unto the Place of their Banishment, but by the way take their Lives, as hath been the Practise commonly amongst the Turks on the like Occasions. And this sad Account shall suffice to put an end to the many Tragedies of this History.

Notes

• * 1.1

  The Queen Mother.
• * 1.2

  Sultan Musta∣pha's Be∣ginnings.
• * 1.3

  The Grand Vizier put into fear.
• * 1.4

  Sultan Mustapha his Saying.
• * 1.5

  The Sultan's Humour.
• * 1.6

  February.
• * 1.7

  Lord Paget at Adri∣anople.
• * 2.1

  A Fight between the Poles and the Tar∣tars.
• * 2.2

  The Tar∣tars beaten.
• * 2.3

  The Tar∣tars with∣draw.
• * 2.4

  Scio re∣gained by the Turks.
• * 2.5

  The Greeks in Scio fa∣voured by the Turks.
• * 2.6

  Changes at Court.
• * 2.7

  March.
• * 2.8

  March.
• * 2.9

  All Persons Taxed.
• * 2.10

  A Donative refused to the Soldiers.
• * 2.11

  Retard∣ments to the Motion of the War.
• * 2.12

  The Mufti Deposed, the Vizier Strangled.
• * 2.13

  June.
• * 2.14

  New Or∣ders for the Army.
• * 2.15

  The Grand Seignior's Severities.
• * 2.16

  June.
• * 2.17

  Septemb.
• * 2.18

  Veterani defeated.
• * 2.19

  The ill Conduct of the Impe∣rial Army, in Anno 1695.
• * 2.20

  Great Ho∣nour gained by the Sul∣tan.
• * 2.21

  The Sultan Orders for his Return to Adria∣nople.
• * 2.22

  The Grand Seignior marches back.
• * 2.23

  The Tur∣kish Disci∣pline.
• * 2.24

  The Grand Seignior marches to Constan∣tinople.
• * 2.25

  Novemb.
• * 2.26

  The Allai, or Triumph at the En∣trance into Constan∣tinople.
• * 2.27

  Sahin Pa∣sha killed.
• * 2.28

  Tekely neglected.
• * 2.29

  The Vene∣tians at Sea give a Defeat to the Turks.
• * 2.30

  The Pasha of Diarbe∣kir put to Flight.
• * 2.31

  And the Turks de∣feated.
• * 2.32

  The Grand Seignior, with the Queen Mo∣ther leaves Constan∣tinople.
• * 2.33

  April.
• * 2.34

  A Fire at Constan∣tinople.
• * 2.35

  June.
• * 2.36

  July.
• * 2.37

  The Battle of Olasch.
• * 2.38

  The Turks worsted.
• * 2.39

  Septemb. 27, and 28.
• * 2.40

  October.
• * 2.41

  The French do great Services.
• * 2.42

  Novemb.
• * 2.43

  Audience of the Per∣sian Am∣bassador.
• * 2.44

  The Persi∣ans depart.
• * 2.45

  Septemb.
• * 2.46

  Preparati∣ons for the Turkish Fleet.
• * 2.47

  Alteration of the Coyn in Turky.
• * 2.48

  Maritime Preparati∣ons for the Year 1697.
• * 2.49

  A Story of the Consul and a Jew at Gran Cairo.
• * 2.50

  March.
• * 2.51

  The Greek Patriarch a Rash Man.
• * 2.52

  Tekely's Poor State and Condi∣tion.
• * 2.53

  April.
• * 2.54

  Tekely's Afflictions.
• * 2.55

  August.
• * 2.56

  The Battle of the Ti∣biscus.
• * 4.1

  Inclinati∣ons of the Turks to∣wards a Peace.
• * 4.2

  October
• * 4.3

  October.
• * 4.4

  Castle Doboy Surrenders.
• * 4.5

  October.
• * 4.6

  January.
• * 4.7

  June.
• * 4.8

  Octob. 26. O.S.
• * 4.9

  Novemb.